usrguide

339
User Guide 1 Table of Contents INTRODUCTION 15 System overview 16 EDA Client 16 Schematic Sheet Editor 16 Schematic Library Editor 17 Design capabilities 17 File, Netlist and output format options 18 View multiple sheets -- run multiple servers 18 Hierarchical and multi-sheet support 19 Guided Wiring 19 Flexible selection 20 Powerful editing options 20 Library system 21 Special strings 21 Font support 21 Array placement options 21 Alignment tools 22 Design verification tools 22 Windows support for printing and plotting 22 Windows display options 22 Advanced Schematic documentation 23 Advanced Schematic User Guide 23 Advanced Schematic Reference Manual 24 Using this guide 24 On-line help 25 INSTALLATION 27 Assumptions made by this guide 27

Upload: larry-andrews

Post on 26-Nov-2014

354 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: USRGUIDE

User Guide

1

Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION 15System overview 16

EDA Client 16

Schematic Sheet Editor 16

Schematic Library Editor 17

Design capabilities 17File, Netlist and output format options 18View multiple sheets -- run multiple servers 18Hierarchical and multi-sheet support 19Guided Wiring 19Flexible selection 20Powerful editing options 20Library system 21Special strings 21Font support 21Array placement options 21Alignment tools 22Design verification tools 22Windows support for printing and plotting 22Windows display options 22

Advanced Schematic documentation 23Advanced Schematic User Guide 23Advanced Schematic Reference Manual 24

Using this guide 24

On-line help 25

INSTALLATION 27Assumptions made by this guide 27

Page 2: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

2

System Requirements 27Minimum 27Recommended 28

Installing the Software 28

Enabling the Software 28Installing the Hardlock 28Unlocking the Software 29

A QUICK TOUR OF EDA CLIENT 31The Client / Server Environment 31

What is EDA Client? 33What is an EDA Client Server? 33

The EDA Client Environment 34Tool Tips 34Client Menu 35EDA Editor Tabs 35EDA Editor Panel 35Project Manager 36Client Status Bar 36Resources 36Processes 36Process Launchers 37

Customizing The EDA Workspace 37Resources 37Assigning a Process to a Process Launcher 39Editor panel 41Project Manager 41Client Status Bar 41Editor Tabs 41

Installing and Starting a Server 42

Opening a document 42Opening a New Document 42Opening an Existing Document 43

Text Expert 43Languages 44Syntax Highlighting 44Document Options 45

Page 3: USRGUIDE

User Guide

3

Resetting Defaults 45

Macros 45

THEORY 47

FUNDAMENTALS OF SCHEMATIC CAPTURE 48The computer model of a circuit 48

The Advanced Schematic component model 49Libraries of component models 50

Connectivity 51Net Identifiers 53

Using connectivity 53Methods 53Physical connectivity 54Logical connectivity 54General rule for connectivity 54Special rules for connectivity 55

Design verification 56Checking sheets and projects 57

Generating reports 57Bill of Materials 57Project Hierarchy report 58Cross Reference report 58Electrical Rules Check report 58Netlist Compare report 59

Linking to other Servers and other Applications 59Netlists 59Special links to PCB systems 60

GENERAL TOPICS 63

CONFIGURATION 64Advanced Schematic Preferences 64

Schematic Tab 64Graphical Edit Tab 64

Page 4: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

4

Default Primitives Tab 65Database Links Tab 66

Schematic Sheets 66Sheet Options 66Choosing a sheet size 66Borders 68Title block 68Grids 68Units 69Organization 69

OPENING, SAVING AND CLOSING FILES 71Opening schematic files 71

File-Open dialog box 71

Opening multi-sheet projects 73

Save Options 74File-Save 74File-Save As 74Save Project 74Save All 74

Close Options 75File-Close 75File-Close Project 75Windows-Close All 75

COMPONENTS AND LIBRARIES 77What are Advanced Schematic libraries? 77

What is a Component and what is a Part? 78

Accessing Components 78Adding and Removing Libraries 79

Placing Parts 81

Part Attributes 82About component text 82Library Reference 83Footprint 83Designator 83

Page 5: USRGUIDE

User Guide

5

Part type 83Sheet Path 84Library text fields 84Part text fields 84Description 85Colors 85Hidden pins 85

How Parts are Saved with the Design 86Project Libraries 87

Updating Parts 87

LIBRARY EDITOR 89Libraries 89

Opening Libraries 90Creating 90

Components and Parts 91Creating and Editing 92Component Pins 92Component Description 93Grouping Components 94Copying Components 95Updating Your Schematic 95

Reports 96Component 96Library 96Component Rule Check 97

WORKING IN ADVANCED SCHEMATIC 99Organizing the Workspace 100

Changing Your View of the Sheet 100

Moving around the Sheet 101Panning 101Browsing 102Jumping 103Location Markers 103Jumping to locations 104

Page 6: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

6

Moving Around the Project 104

Frequently Used Shortcut Keys 105

PROCESSES 107What is a Process? 107

Launching a Process 108Mode 109Parameters 109

Menu bar 110Pop-up menus 110

Menus 110File 110Edit 111View 111Place 111Tools 111Options 111Reports 111Window 112Help 112

Toolbars 112Schematic Editor, Library Editor main toolbars 113Wiring tools 113Drawing tools 114Library tools 114IEEE tools 114

Mouse and keyboard shortcuts 115Keyboard Shortcut keys 115Keyboard shortcuts Autodisplay 116

Process Containers 116Placing 116Configuring 116Executing 117Reports 117

OBJECTS 119Placing 119

Page 7: USRGUIDE

User Guide

7

Example; Placing a Wire 119Wire/bus placement mode 120Automatic junctions 121

Creating graphical objects 121

Editing 121While Placing 122Graphically 122

Quick-Copy Attributes 135

Moving and Dragging 136Moving Objects 136Dragging Objects 137

Working With Text 138

Arrays 140Placement Variables 141

Aligning Objects 142

MULTI-SHEET DESIGNS AND PROJECTMANAGEMENT 145

Overview 145

Managing multiple sheet projects 146

Structure of a multi sheet schematic 147

Master sheets and sub-sheets 147

Understanding hierarchy 148Net identifiers 148The scope of net identifiers 150

Five models of hierarchy 151Model 1 - Global ports define intersheet connections 152Model 2 - Global net labels and ports 153Model 3 - Sheet entries define simple hierarchy 154Model 4 - complex hierarchy defined by sheet entries 156Using sheet symbols to implement hierarchy 157Model 5 - Sheet parts to represent hierarchy 158More about hierarchical design 158

Tools for working with Hierarchy 159

Page 8: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

8

Project Manager display options 159Navigating through a project 160Creating sheet symbols and sub-sheets the easy way 161

Adding and removing individual sheets from a project 162Rebuild Button 162

DESIGN VERIFICATION 163Suppress ERC symbols 164

Verification Options 164Setup Electrical Rules Check 165Other Options 166

Net Identifier Scope 166

Electrical Rules Matrix 167Error Report Format 168

Resolving Errors 168

NETLISTS 171Overview 171

Connectivity 172

About netlists 173Netlist formats 173Generating netlists 174Output Format options 174Scope of Net Identifiers 175Options 176Protel netlist format 177Protel 2 netlist format 178Protel netlist parameters 180

Other netlist formats 180Advanced PLD netlist output 181

FONTS 183Font management 183

Font Technology 183Font Style dialog box 184

Page 9: USRGUIDE

User Guide

9

Organization of Fonts in Advanced Schematic 185Changing Fonts 185

PRESENTATION QUALITY SCHEMATICS 189Why presentation quality? 190

Capabilities of printers 190Dot matrix impact printers 191Plotters 192Ink jet printers 194Laser printers 194PostScript imagesetters 194

Using color 195Customizing display colors 195More about color assignment 195

Image files 196

HARDCOPY 199Overview 199

PostScript options 199

Generating a print or plot 199Select Printer 200Batch Type 201Color mode 201Margins 202Scaling prints and plot 202Tiling 202Setup 203Network 204Preview 204Large format and pen plots 205

REPORTS 211Bill of Materials 211

Text BOM format 211CSV text BOM format 212

Page 10: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

10

Cross reference 213

Project hierarchy 214

LINKS WITH ADVANCED PCB 215Netlists 215

Routing Directives 215

Bi-directional cross probing 216

Annotation 216

Back Annotating 216

Netlist Load problems 217Missing components or pins (PCB layout) 217

ADVANCED TOPICS 219

RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 220Advanced Schematic Resources 220

EDA Client Resources 221

Managing Resources 222Customizing Resources 222Editing Resources 222Configuring Resources 223

Resetting Defaults 223

SHEET TEMPLATES 225Special Strings 225

Creating a Template 226

RE-ENTRANT EDITING 231

GLOBAL EDITING 233Cross-project global editing 234

Page 11: USRGUIDE

User Guide

11

Global Editing Strategies 234Using wildcards when globally editing text 235Syntax for wildcard search and replace edits 236

LINKING TO DATABASES 239Hot Linking to a Database 239

Establishing the Links 240Updating the Data 241Using an Index File 242

Importing and Exporting to a Database 242Exporting to a Database 243Importing from a Database 245

SPICE INTERFACE 249SPICE netlist support 249

SPICE Text Frames 250Voltage and Current Sources 250Spice Power Ports 250Map files 251Sample Text Frame 251

EESOF INTERFACE 253EEsof Simulation support 253

Setting component parameters 253Embedded text blocks 255General simulation settings 256

XILINX INTERFACE 259General 259

Libraries 259Special Library Fields 260

Components 2602000 AND 3000 Family CLB and IOB Components 260

Symbols 261Pad Symbols 261

Page 12: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

12

Special Purpose Symbols 261

Tags 262Pin Tags 262Signal Tags 262

Simulation Information 264Simulation Probes 264Simulation Stimulus 264

Defining Timing Requirements 265TIMESPEC 265TIMEGRP 266

Specifying the Part Type 266

XNF netlists 266structure 267

Supplied Example Projects 268

ORCAD COMPATIBILITY 269Overview 269

SDT 3/4 sheet files 269

Backwards compatibility to OrCAD SDT 269

OrCAD Design Objects, terminology and conventions 271

Menu commands 272

Utilities 272

Loading Your OrCAD STD Designs 272Transferring the Libraries 273Transferring the Schematic Sheets 273

Editing the Design 275

Transferring the Design Back to OrCAD 276

PROTEL DOS SCHEMATIC COMPATIBILITY 277Overview 277

Loading a multi-sheet Design 277

Library Differences 278

Page 13: USRGUIDE

User Guide

13

Loading Schematic 3 designs 278PROTEL.LIB 278Extending PROTEL.LIB 279Bringing Across Libraries 279Pin Editing 280Menu commands 281Utilities 281Block, highlighting, etc. 281

ASCII FILE FORMATS 283Schematic Sheet Editor ascii file format 285

Schematic Library Editor ascii file format 307

GLOSSARY 311

INDEX 333

Page 14: USRGUIDE
Page 15: USRGUIDE

User Guide

15

Introduction

This guide provides an introduction to the AdvancedSchematic design system, including many of the features,key concepts and terminology used throughout theapplication. The Advanced Schematic User Guide isintended to provide the information you need to get up andrunning with the system and to learn to use the basicfeatures required to design a circuit, perform electrical rulechecks, generate a netlist and print out designdocumentation. Additional, detailed information aboutAdvanced Schematic design objects and processes can befound in the Advanced Schematic Reference Manual.

Page 16: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

16

System overviewThe Protel Design System has been created for today’spreferred PC environment. This system combines thenatural advantages of Microsoft® WindowsTM with anumber of sophisticated tools to yield a sophisticated,flexible schematic capture system with powerful links toother Electronic Design Automation Tools. AdvancedSchematic now runs as a server in the Protel EDA Client™Server environment. Advanced Schematic includes twoindependent editors: the Schematic Sheet Editor and theSchematic Library Editor.

EDA ClientEDA Client has been developed to fulfill the ongoingdemands of the electronics engineering industry. Thesedemands include a need for a standard user environment,high integration of EDA tools with ease of expansion andtotal support for networked distribution of EDA resources.A customizable environment, where the user can create andmodify menus, toolbars and shortcut keys as well as createand run macros is now expected by users of EDA tools.

All this, without being restricted to a single EDA vendor, iswhat the EDA Client Server environment offers. Clientprovides the standard user environment, and the platformon which to run any number of EDA Servers. These serverscould include schematic capture tools, PCB design tools,simulation tools, PLD / FPGA design tools, customizeddocumentation tools, in fact any tool which conforms to theopen architecture of EDA Client. These tools can all berunning concurrently within EDA Client.

Schematic Sheet EditorThe Schematic Sheet Editor is the primary document editorin Advanced Schematic. This editor allows the user to

Page 17: USRGUIDE

User Guide

17

create, edit, check and print the sheet files that comprise adesign project. All the tools and utilities needed to generatevalid netlists, perform electrical rule checks, design reportsand presentation quality schematic drawings are availablein the Schematic Sheet Editor.

Schematic Library EditorThe Schematic Library Editor is the other document editorin Advanced Schematic. It is used to create, edit andmanage libraries of component parts. In AdvancedSchematic, the term part refers to the symbolic entity thatrepresents one part of a multi-part component (for example,one gate in a 7400) or a generic component type (such as aresistor). The Schematic Library Editor shares manycommon features with the Schematic Sheet Editor, plusspecialized tools and features for component part creationand library management tasks.

Design capabilitiesAdvanced Schematic is a complete electronic circuit designenvironment with many attractive features for productivework. You can use Advanced Schematic by itself for circuitdesign. When combined with simulation or board layouttools, Advanced Schematic becomes the front-end of a fullyautomated, integrated, end-to-end design system. Howeveryou use Advanced Schematic, you’ll appreciate its powerand flexibility.

Advanced Schematic can generate single sheet, multiplesheet and fully hierarchical designs of virtually any size,limited only by the available memory and storage capacityof your system. Sheet sizes include A, B, C, D, E (or metricsizes A4-A0) plus user-defined sheets. Users can also createcustom sheet borders and title blocks and save customformats as templates for re-use. Advanced Schematicstandard component libraries include over 15,000 parts,

Page 18: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

18

with ANSI, DeMorgan and IEEE display options (whereapplicable).

File, Netlist and output format optionsOne unique feature of Advanced Schematic is itsunparalleled support for OrCAD® design files and libraries.

Advanced Schematic loads OrCAD SDT (version 3, 4 or386+) files. Translation of imported drawings is 100% andfull support is provided for all OrCAD SDT design objectsand functions. De-compiled OrCAD SDT libraries can betranslated into Advanced Schematic format, as well. Specialsupport is also provided for Protel DOS Schematic 3.3designs, including both file translation and conversion ofProtel DOS Schematic 3.3 bitmap component parts intoAdvanced Schematic vector libraries.

Over thirty netlist formats are generated by AdvancedSchematic including industry standard EDIF 2.0 and EDIF2.0 hierarchical formats, special formats for Spice and othersimulation environments, as well as Xilinx XNFhierarchical netlists. Windows includes support for manyoutput devices including dot matrix printers, PostScriptprinters and imagesetters, as well as plotters of manydifferent types.

Some key features and benefits of the Advanced Schematicdesign system are described below. These items will bedetailed, in the relevant sections of this guide.

View multiple sheets -- run multiple serversEDA Client and Advanced Schematic are Windows MDI(multiple document interface) compliant. As well as beingable to run multiple applications in the Windowsenvironment, you can now run multiple servers in the EDAClient environment. Have the schematic library open, theschematic sheets open and the PCB open, all in the oneenvironment. Switch between each of these documents with

Page 19: USRGUIDE

User Guide

19

a click of the mouse. Tile them to view them allsimultaneously.

Fixed file size and database limitations have been removedby the use of Windows 386 Enhanced mode, which includesvirtual memory support.

You can use the Windows clipboard to Cut, Copy or Pastesheet elements, text or graphics from one sheet to another.Windows metafile (.WMF) support allows you to use theclipboard to Paste selections from Advanced Schematicsheets into other applications. You can also copy text fromother applications, via the Windows clipboard and pastethis text into Advanced Schematic text frames.

Hierarchical and multi-sheet supportAdvanced Schematic supports single sheet, multiple sheetand fully hierarchical designs including complex hierarchywhere multiple instances of a single sheet file can be usedin a project. Multi-sheet projects can be opened, closed orsaved with a single File menu item. Projects can benavigated visually using the Project Manager, a specialpanel that resembles the Windows File Manager. TheProject Manager displays all open files in a hierarchicaltree structure. Users can click on sheet icons to move fromsheet-to-sheet.

Guided WiringSpecial automation features speed the connection ofelectrical items in the schematic sheets. An electrical gridprovides true “snap to” wiring of all electrical items: ports,sheet entries, buses, bus entries, net identifiers, wires andparts. When this feature is active, the cursor will jump to thenearest electrical “hot spot” within the range of theelectrical grid and then change shape to indicate theconnection point. The user need only click (or release LEFTMOUSE) to complete the connection.

Page 20: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

20

Options allow the user to turn the electrical grid off or onand to automatically place junctions when terminating awire tangent to an existing wire. Junctions are alsoautomatically placed when wires cross pins of parts orpower objects.

Connections between electrical objects are maintained asthe objects are “dragged” to a new location on the sheet.The system will even add or remove wire segments tomaintain orthogonal routing during complex moves.

Flexible selectionGroups of items can be selected by sheet, by physicalconnectivity or by designating an area of the drawing.Individual items can be added to or removed from theselection. Selections can be manipulated using standardWindows Edit menu items such as Cut, Copy, Paste orClear; moved; rotated; Imported or Exported as files. Theclipboard supports .WMF format selections which can bepasted into other Windows applications. An Add Templatesto Clipboard option allows the user to Copy an entire sheetto the clipboard, including the border and title block.

Powerful editing optionsDesign objects (parts, wires, graphical entities, etc.) can beedited by double-clicking directly on the item to open itstype dialog box, which displays every editable objectattribute. These changes can be globally applied across asheet or across an entire multi-sheet project using specificconditions to define the targets. For example, when editingwires you can change the color or wire size or bothattributes. These changes can be globally applied to otherwires on the sheet, or to other open sheets. Similar globaloptions are provided for components and other objects.

Text editing is supported by powerful Find and Replaceprocesses which allow the user to define the scope of theedit across multi-sheet projects.

Page 21: USRGUIDE

User Guide

21

Library systemAdvanced Schematic includes comprehensive tools formanaging component libraries. Any number of libraries canbe opened and accessed without leaving the sheet editor. Awide range of standard manufacturers’ libraries areincluded with Advanced Schematic. Components can bebrowsed and placed directly from the Schematic LibraryEditor. Simultaneous multi-user library access is supportedfor network installations. Placed parts in sheets can beglobally updated to reflect library-level changes.

Components include eight read-only (library) text fieldsand 16 sheet-level text fields of up to 255 characters thatcan be edited for each instance of a part. Users can pre-define these field names for a component type in the libraryeditor, for convenient reference.

Special stringsSpecial purpose pre-defined strings allow the user to placedate, sheet name, filename, component count and otherinformation to be interpreted at plot time. For example,placing the string “.DATE,” on the sheet, places the currentsystem date on the plot. Special strings can be incorporatedin sheet templates.

Font supportA Font Manager lists and previews all available system andprinter fonts. Users can make intelligent font assignmentsfor both display and output. Windows TrueType fonts arefully supported. A system font can be assigned forcomponent pins, port and power object names and sheetreference text. Users can specify printer/plotter fonts foron-screen display.

Array placement optionsLinear array placement allows automated step-and-repeatplacement of objects in the sheet. This can include

Page 22: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

22

individual objects or complex selections of objects. Theusers can specify the number of repeats and set pre-definedx and y offsets, and text increments.

Alignment toolsObjects can be aligned by their left/right/top/bottom sides,distributed horizontally or vertically or moved to theplacement grid.

Design verification toolsElectrical Rule Check allows quick verification of large orcomplex drawings. ERC checks are performed inaccordance with user-specified physical and logicalproperties. Options include flagging and reporting a widerange of physical/logical violations including unconnectednet labels, unconnected power objects and floating inputpins.

Windows support for printing and plottingDot matrix and laser printing, color printing, pen plottingand PostScript output are all controlled from a commonPrint menu item. Any device supported by Windows can beselected. Advanced Schematic graphical design toolssupport the production of presentation quality artwork.

Windows display optionsAdvanced Schematic makes full use of 24 bit color graphicscards and monitors supported under Windows. On standardgraphics adapters such as VGA, dithering can be used tosimulate colors beyond the standard 20 Windows solidtones. 242 pre-defined colors on a special palette areprovided, along with the ability to define custom colors.Advanced Schematic makes full use of the Windowsgraphical environment, allowing the user to place TrueTypefonts, place graphical images of many formats and to assigncolors independently to all display items.

Page 23: USRGUIDE

User Guide

23

Advanced Schematic documentationThe documentation for the Protel Design System andAdvanced Schematic is organized in the following manner:

Advanced Schematic User GuideThis User Guide has been designed to guide the new userthrough the many features of Advanced Schematic and tosimplify the retrieval of specific information once you havea working knowledge of the package.

EDA Client and Advanced Schematic are similar inoperation to other Windows applications. Once you havemastered a few Windows basics you’ll be ready to learn theProtel design system.

This guide provides a general introduction to the AdvancedSchematic package including some of the key fundamentalsof the sheet editor: wiring and drawing tools, shortcuts,design verification, printing your designs and generatingreports. It also covers fundamentals of component partslibraries and library management using the SchematicLibrary Editor. The emphasis of this guide is on the keyconcepts needed in order to use the sheet editor and libraryeditor effectively.

Some step-by-step procedures are provided to illustrate keyoperations. Most process descriptions include step-by-stepprocedures in the Advanced Schematic Reference Manualdescribed below.

This guide includes special terminology that is unique tocircuit design in the Advanced Schematic system. Forexample, words like template, wire or probe have a specificmeaning within the Advanced Schematic environment.Definitions for these words will be found in the Glossary, atthe end of this guide. Your Windows documentationincludes definitions for special Windows terminology. Acomprehensive index follows the glossary, making it easyto search for specific information by topic or key word.

Page 24: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

24

Advanced Schematic Reference ManualA separate Advanced Schematic Reference Manual includesdetailed descriptions of each process available in AdvancedSchematic. A comprehensive index is included, making iteasy to search for specific information by topic or keyword.

Using this guideThe following conventions are used to identify informationneeded to perform Advanced Schematic tasks in this guide:

Windows refers to Microsoft Windows version 3.1 orWindows for Workgroups version 3.1 or Windows NT;DOS refers to MS-DOS or PC-DOS (version 6.2 or lateris recommended for best performance).

This manual generally follows the conventions used in theMicrosoft Windows Users Guide. Standardized presentationincludes:

italic Refers to special Advanced Schematic terminology. Mostof these unique terms are italicized at first use and aredefined in the Glossary, at the end of this guide. Italic textis also used to indicate specific text the user is to type,exactly as shown, into a dialog box.

bold Used as a place-holder for information the user is toprovide, e. g. a file name, etc.

CAPITALS Indicates directory or file names.

Initial Capital Signifies menu item names, process names, tool names,dialog box names and dialog box option names. Nestedselections are hyphenated, for example: File-Save.

SMALL CAPS Used to indicate key names, such as ENTER or ESC.

SHIFT+ALT Means: hold down the SHIFT key and press the ALT key.

Page 25: USRGUIDE

User Guide

25

F1, F2 Means: press and release the F1 key, then press the F2 key.

Used to highlight warnings and special advisoryinformation.

On-line helpIndependent On-line Help is provided for both theSchematic Sheet Editor and the Schematic Library Editor.To search for information about the editor, simply go to theHelp menu.

Page 26: USRGUIDE
Page 27: USRGUIDE

User Guide

27

Installation

Assumptions made by this guideThree assumptions are made about the user in this UserGuide:

That the user is familiar with the principles, terminologyand symbology of electronic circuit design. Whereverpossible, Protel EDA tools and documentation usesstandard electronic engineering principles andterminology;The guide also assumes that you are familiar withWindows 3 icons, menus, windows and using the mouseto make selections. It also assumes a basicunderstanding about how Windows managesapplications (programs and utilities) and documents(data files) to perform routine tasks such as startingapplications, opening documents and saving your work.If you are new to Windows, please start with yourMicrosoft Windows Users Guide;That the user has a basic understanding of MicrosoftDOS and its use of directories, file naming conventions,etc.

System Requirements

Minimum• Microsoft Windows 3.1 running on an IBM PC or

compatible• 386 processor• 8 MB of RAM

Page 28: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

28

• SVGA display, 16 color (800x600 resolution)• 10 MB of hard disk space for minimum installation

Recommended• 486 processor with numeric co-processor• 16 MB of RAM• SVGA display, 256 color (800x600 resolution or higher)• 30 MB of hard disk space for complete installation

Installing the SoftwareInstall the Protel Software by selecting the File-Run... menuitem in the Windows Program Manager. In the Run dialogbox, enter the following;

<drive_name>:\setup

Where <drive_name> is the drive you are installing from.This is typically A or B when installing from floppies, or Dor E when installing from CD ROM.

Follow the installation instructions from there.

Enabling the SoftwareAfter installing your Protel software, it is important to enterthe Access Key Codes to enable all the features of thepackage. Protel Software can be installed and run withoutentering any Access Key Codes. However, without codesthe software is running in demo mode, so design filescannot be saved.

Installing the HardlockIf your Protel Software requires a hardlock, it will havebeen supplied with the software (your Protel distributor willinform you if a hardlock is required). The hardlock is not

Page 29: USRGUIDE

User Guide

29

packed inside the shrink wrapped colored box. It willprobably be packed in a section of folded cardboard, whichis then packed together with shrink wrapped colored boxinside a larger box.

Once you have located the hardlock install it on the parallel(printer) port of your computer. Turn your computer offprior to connecting the hardlock. Be sure to plug thehardlock on the right way around, as shown on thehardlock. If you have a printer connected to the parallelport, re-connect the printer cable to the other side of thehardlock. The hardlock can be installed on any parallelport, the software will locate it automatically.

Unlocking the SoftwareUn-locking the various features of the software is done byentering the appropriate Access Key Codes.

Select the Help-About menu item to pop up the SecurityLocks dialog box. All the features currently available willbe listed in the Locks section of the dialog box. If noAccess Key Code has been entered for a feature, its doorwill be locked.

To un-lock a feature, select it and press the Un-Lock button.The Lock dialog box for that feature will pop up. Enter theappropriate Access Key Code for that feature and press theTest button. If the Access Key Code has been enteredcorrectly the Access Rights will change, indicatingsuccessful un-locking. Click OK to close the Locks dialogbox. When a feature has been successfully un-locked itsdoor icon will appear open.

Continue to select and un-lock each feature for which youhave Access Key Codes.

Page 30: USRGUIDE
Page 31: USRGUIDE

User Guide

31

A Quick Tour of EDA Client

The Client / Server EnvironmentClient / server architecture is an attempt to more sensiblypartition the work performed by the various applications ona PC. Traditionally, users source their suite of EDA toolsfrom various vendors. The schematic capture and PCBdesign tools might come from one vendor, the simulationtools from another, the PLD / FPGA tools from a third andthe PCB autorouter tool from a fourth. This meansdesigners must not only be competent in using numerouspackages, but be able to switch fluidly back and forthbetween them, coping with the idiosyncrasies of eachdesign environment. As EDA design tools become morepowerful they are also becoming more complex to learn and

Page 32: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

32

to operate. This compounds the problem of multiple userenvironments.

Rather than this vertical approach, where each EDA vendordevelops their own proprietary user interface for their tools,an alternative approach is for EDA vendors to partitiontheir tools into the user interface (client) portion, and the“engine” or “services” (server) portion. This structure isknown as client / server architecture.

Essentially, the client provides the user environment; theWindows, the menus, keyboard shortcut keys and toolbars,as well as supporting any specialized panels that a servermay require.

The server then performs the tasks, for example creating anetlist, simulating a circuit or autorouting a board.

This architecture has many advantages, these include;

• The user only needs to learn one (client) environment.• From within this one environment a number of servers

can be run.• Servers can be run remotely from the client. This could

be across the network, or even across the Internet.• Users can easily bring together their own specialized tool

set, with servers from different vendors, into a highlyintegrated environment.

• As servers are accessible across the network, a companycan purchase and position servers on their network tosuit their needs.

• Servers can be upgraded independently of the client.• Vendors of EDA products can more easily develop

servers as they do not have to develop the userenvironment.

Page 33: USRGUIDE

User Guide

33

What is EDA Client?EDA Client is an application, or user environment,developed specifically for the EDA (Electronic DesignAutomation) industry. Within EDA Client, the user is ableto run their own suite of EDA Servers. These could includea schematic capture server, a netlist server, an FPGA designserver and a digital simulation server. Another user mightrun a PCB design server and an autorouter server on theirClient, perhaps also providing a remote site autoroutingservice with their autorouter server.

Client provides the user resources, that is the menus,keyboard shortcuts, toolbars, status bar and projectmanagement panel (Project Manager). These are all userdefinable. The user can easily modify or develop their ownmenus, keyboard shortcuts, toolbars and macros. They canalso readily re-configure the EDA environment, positioningand hiding resources to suit their needs.

Within Client, the user can have any number of documentsopen, each supported by a different server.

As in any application that provides a Multiple DocumentInterface, a simple click of the mouse takes you from onedocument to another. Having mastered and tailored thissingle environment, the user is then able to move easilybetween their various design documents. These could be aschematic and a PCB, or a schematic and an FPGA design.Their focus can remain on the design task being performedin each document, rather than attempting to recall whichkeyboard shortcut keys to use in this application and wherethat command lives in another application.

What is an EDA Client Server?An EDA Server provides the “services” in the Protel EDAClient environment. To provide these services, the serverwill support a set of processes. A process carries out theactual task, such as redrawing the screen, or generating aBill Of Materials.

Page 34: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

34

A server may include an extensive set of processes, such asa schematic server which needs to be able to placecomponents, wire, buses, generate reports and so on. Or itmay include only a single process, such as a netlist server.

Document EditorsTo edit the documents that a server can create, the servermight provide one or more Document Editors. A DocumentEditor allows the user to edit a particular type of document.Some examples of the document editors a server mayprovide are;

• A netlist server, which would have no document editors(if necessary, the netlist would be edited in a text editor);

• A text editing server, which would typically have onedocument editor for editing ascii documents (but couldinclude other document editors, perhaps a binarydocument editor).

• A schematic server, which could have two documenteditors, one for editing schematic sheets, the other the forediting schematic components.

The EDA Client Environment

Tool TipsFor a tip on what a toolbar button does, or how to move orsize a panel, position the cursor and leave it stationary forabout a second. A Tool Tip will appear with a briefdescription of what that button does, or how to re-size thepanel, or how to edit the menu bar.

Page 35: USRGUIDE

User Guide

35

Client Menu

The Client menu is always available on the menu bar,regardless of which Document Editor is currently active.From the Client menu you control EDA Client. It allowsyou to do things like install and remove servers, customizeand edit resources, set the user preferences and run a macroor another Windows application.

EDA Editor TabsThe EDA Editor Tabs initially appear down the left of theClient workspace. These allow the user to readily identifywhich Document Editors are available and which is theactive Document Editor.

Selecting an Editor by clicking on its EDA Editor Tab willmake it the active Editor and present the document that iscurrently active in that Editor.

EDA Editor PanelClient offers an Editor Panel, which Document Editors canthen use to provide the user with access to features andinformation. An example is the Advanced Schematic

Page 36: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

36

Document Editor Panel, which provides access to librariesand their components and also allows you to browsethrough the objects placed in the document.

Project ManagerThe Project Manager displays all currently open documentsand any relationship between documents. A document canbe made active by clicking on it in the Project Manager.

Client Status BarThe Client Status Bar includes the Status Bar and TheCommand Status Bar. The Status Bar is dynamic, it providesinformation about the cursor position in the workspace andthe current state of the process being executed.

The Command Status bar reports the current process beingexecuted and gives a description of that process.

ResourcesWithin the EDA Client Server environment you can performoperations such as opening and closing documents, editingthese documents and generating output based on thosedocuments. This is done via the menus, toolbars andkeyboard shortcuts. Menus, toolbars and keyboard shortcutlists are know as resources in the EDA Client Serverenvironment.

ProcessesWhen you perform any action in the EDA Clientenvironment, such as opening a file or placing a wire, youinvoke a process. A process can be thought of as thesoftware executing a sequence of jobs, for examplerefreshing the screen, zooming in, placing a net label, andso on.

Page 37: USRGUIDE

User Guide

37

Processes are provided by EDA Client and by the installedServers. Each process is invoked, or launched, by a ProcessLauncher.

Each process is identified by its process identifier. Anexample is Client:EditToolbars, another is Sch:PlaceWire.Any process identifier can be linked to any processlauncher.

Process LaunchersWhen you select a menu item or click on a toolbar button,you launch a process. Menu items are process launchers.Toolbar buttons and shortcut keys are also processlaunchers.

Customizing The EDA Workspace

ResourcesResources for each Document Editor can be customized byselecting the Client Menu-Customize menu item. This willpop up the Customize Resources dialog box. From here youcan edit any of the resources available in that editor. Menuand shortcut key resources can also be edited by selectingthe appropriate menu item in the Client menu.

ToolbarsThe easiest way to edit a toolbar is to double clickanywhere in the toolbar. This will pop up the Edit Toolbardialog box.

Page 38: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

38

Here you can add, remove and re-position buttons. Select abutton and press Edit to pop up the Edit Button dialog box.In this dialog box you can re-assign the button bitmap andthe process this button will launch.

If the Position of the toolbar is not fixed, it can berepositioned in the workspace by simply dragging it so thatit floats in the document workspace, or dragging it to any ofthe other edges of the workspace.

If a toolbar is hidden, its display status can be toggled in theCustomize Resources dialog box (Client Menu-Customizemenu item).

Keyboard Shortcut KeysIn the Client menu, select the Edit Shortcuts menu item.This will pop up the Edit Shortcut Keys dialog box.

Page 39: USRGUIDE

User Guide

39

Here you can create, edit and remove Shortcut keys. Selecta Shortcut key and press Edit to pop up the Edit ShortcutKey dialog box. In this dialog box you can assign theshortcut key(s) and the process this key will launch.

MenusThe easiest way to edit a menu is to double click anywherein the menu bar. This will pop up the Edit Menu dialog box.Here you can create and remove menu items and change thestructure of the menus. The structure of the menu can bechanged graphically (simply click and drag) or by selectingthe menu item and pressing the appropriate directionbutton.

Assigning a Process to a Process LauncherWhen you create a new process launcher, such as a toolbarbutton, you must assign a process for that button to launch.To assign a process you need to know what process youwould like to be launched. EDA Client includes features toassist in locating a particular process and learning whateach process does.

To create a new process launcher, edit the resource youwish to customize as previously described.

Page 40: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

40

The Edit Toolbar and Keyboard Shortcut Key Editor dialogboxes will pop up with a list of all currently availableprocesses on the left of the dialog box. There are two waysto filter this list so it displays a narrower range of processesto choose from. Below the list is a drop down list box whichallows you to display the processes for a particular server.Use this if you know which server the process is providedby. Above the list of processes is a filter text box. Todisplay only those processes which contain a certain string,type the string into the filter text box. The * (anycharacters) and ? (any single character) wildcards can alsobe used.

Click on a process to see a brief description at the bottom ofthe dialog box. Press the Info button to pop up a completedescription of the selected process.

The Edit Menu, Edit Button and Edit Keyboard Shortcutdialog boxes have a Browse button, which pops up theProcess Browser dialog box. This can also be used to locatea process in the same way as described in the previousparagraph.

Page 41: USRGUIDE

User Guide

41

All the dialog boxes used for editing resources have an Infobutton. Press this button to pop up a help window for a fulldescription of the process.

Editor panelThe Editor Panel display status can be toggled in either theView menu, or the Preferences dialog box (Client Menu-Preferences).

Project ManagerThe Project Manager can positioned on either side of theworkspace and its width can be re-sized.

To move it to the other side of the workspace, position thecursor within the frame around the Project Managerwindow and click and drag it to the desired location.

To alter the width, position the cursor along the right handedge of the Project Manager. When the cursor changes to avertical bar with left and right arrows, click and drag to re-size it.

Client Status BarThe Client Status Bar can be positioned on either thebottom or top of the workspace by dragging it to the desiredlocation. Its display status can be toggled in either the Viewmenu, or the Preferences dialog box (Client Menu-Preferences).

Editor TabsThe Editor Tabs can be positioned on any side of theworkspace by dragging them to the desired location. Theirdisplay status can be toggled in the Preferences dialog box(Client Menu-Preferences).

Page 42: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

42

Installing and Starting a ServerServers are run from within EDA Client. You must berunning EDA Client to be able to install and start a server.To install and start a server;

• Go to the Client menu and select the Servers menu item.The EDA Servers dialog box will pop up, with a list of allcurrently installed servers.

• To install a new server, press the Install button. The EDAClient Server Install dialog box will pop up.

• The installation file for each server has the file extensionINS. Locate and select the server you wish to install.

• Clicking OK will install the server. It will have a Statusof Not Started. When a server is Not Started it is notoccupying any memory. If you do not start it now it willautomatically be started the first time you use it. Whenyou close the EDA Servers dialog box an EDA EditorTab will appear for each Document Editor the Serverprovides.

Opening a documentOne of the powerful features of EDA Client is that it allowsyou to have multiple documents open, documents whichmay have been created by different servers. Having thiscapability means you must have the server that created adocument installed before a document of that type can beopened.

Opening a New Document• Click on the desired Editor Tab to make that Editor

active.• If the Editor has no documents open, it will automatically

open a new empty document for you.

Page 43: USRGUIDE

User Guide

43

• Otherwise, Select File-New to create a new emptydocument. The Select EDA Document Type dialog boxwill pop up. Select the desired document editor and anempty document will open.

Opening an Existing DocumentThe desired Document Editor does not need to be active butit must be installed.

• Select File-Open. The File dialog box will be presented.• In the Document Types section of the dialog box select

the desired Document Editor and file Type.• Locate and select the file you wish to open and click OK.• The document will be opened and presented in the

appropriate Document Editor.• To open a project, the procedure is the same except for

checking the Project check box in the File dialog box.

Text ExpertText Expert is a text editing server supplied with EDAClient. Having a document editor for text editing in EDAClient means there is no need to leave the EDA Clientenvironment to work with ascii files. Netlists and reportscan be viewed, macro scripts can be written. All general textediting can be performed in Text Expert.

Text Expert includes the normal text editing facilities suchas cutting, copying and pasting, search and replace. It alsoincludes a feature known as Syntax Highlighting. Syntaxhighlighting allows you to highlight different elements inthe document based on the syntax, where different wordstypes, symbols and identifiers are assigned unique colors.This feature is an excellent document editing aid,particularly when working with documents with arepetitive, structured nature, such as macro scripts.

Page 44: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

44

To broaden the usefulness of the syntax highlightingfeature, Text Expert allows the definition of multiplelanguages. Syntax highlighting can be uniquely configuredfor each of these languages.

Within each language, there is a set of six types of syntaxidentifiers available; reserved word, symbol, string,number, comment and identifier. The user can then definethe set of valid words or characters for each of theseidentifiers and assign a unique color to each type ofidentifier.

LanguagesText Expert includes a number of pre-defined languages aswell as the capability to create new languages. Theselanguages are not the language of a country or culture likeFrench or Mandarin, rather they are a language becauseeach can have their own syntax highlighting definition.

Languages can be created, edited and deleted in theLanguages dialog box (Options-Change Language menuitem, or the Change Language button on the panel).

Each document can have a language associated with it. Thelanguage is selected in the Languages dialog box. Alanguage is associated with a document type by the fileextension. To associate a file extension with a language,select the language in the Languages dialog box and pressthe Edit button. The Edit Syntax dialog box will pop up. Inthe Associated Files text box enter the file extension. Formultiple file extensions, separate each with a comma.

Syntax HighlightingThere are two distinct parts to Syntax Highlighting. Thefirst is editing the syntax, the second is assigning thehighlight colors to each type of syntax identifier.

To edit the syntax, select the Options-Change Languagemenu item. This pops up the Languages dialog box. Select

Page 45: USRGUIDE

User Guide

45

the language you wish to edit the syntax for and press theEdit button. In the Edit Syntax dialog box you define theset of reserved words, how comments and strings aredelimited, the valid set of symbols and any file extensionsto be associated with this language.

Highlight colors are then assigned in the Text EditorOptions dialog box (Options-Preferences menu item).

Document OptionsAssigning of colors to each type of syntax identifier is donein the Text Editor Options dialog box. There are also anumber of user editing preferences that can be enabledhere.

Resetting DefaultsEDA Client allows the user total freedom customizing themenus, toolbars and shortcut keys. At any stage you canrestore the menus, toolbars and shortcut keys back to theiroriginal state. To do this, select the Client Menu-Serversmenu item. In the EDA Servers dialog box select the serverand press the Configure button. The Configure Serverdialog box will list all the Document Editors provided bythis server. Resetting the defaults for this server will resetthe resources for all Document Editors provided by thisserver. Press the Default button to restore the server’sresources back to their defaults.

MacrosEDA Client is supplied with a Macro server. The macroserver supports two macro scripting languages, MacroPascal and Macro Basic.

Macros provide a powerful mechanism to enhanceproductivity when working in EDA Client. The macro

Page 46: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

46

server supports all the processes available in the EDAClient environment and allows passing of parameters tothose processes. Macros can be written to work with anyserver running in EDA Client.

Macros can be written to perform anything from a repetitivesequence of processes, through to complex wizards whichpop up dialog boxes and respond to user choices. Themacro server also supports OLE automation, a featurewhere operations can be performed in other Windowsapplications (which support OLE automation).

Macro Basic and Macro Pascal are interpreted rather thancompiled, so macros can be run as soon as they are written.Like all processes in the EDA Client environment, macroscan be launched from any process launcher.

The macro server includes a comprehensive error flaggingmechanism. When an error is encountered, the script file isopened in Text Expert, the line in error is displayed andhighlighted, and a dialog box pops up with a description ofthe error condition.

Page 47: USRGUIDE

User Guide

47

Theory

Fundamentals of Schematic Capture

Page 48: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

48

Fundamentals of Schematic Capture

Schematic capture is the process of capturing a ‘schema’, ordiagram, in a computer aided design environment andcapturing the connective elements of the design in the formof a netlist. Defining the circuit at the schematic levelallows the engineer to work with a logical model of thedesign while maintaining the integrity of the physicalmodel that will become the finished product.

The computer model of a circuitOutwardly, the use of schematic capture is similar to thetraditional drafting process, where graphical symbols forcircuit elements (parts, wires, etc.) are rendered indrawings, which become a record of the design. Usingcomputer aided design provides many benefits byautomating the drafting process and allowing easy editingof the design layout.

Page 49: USRGUIDE

User Guide

49

However, it’s the capture part of the schematic captureprocess that provides the main benefit -- creating an integrallink between conceptual design of a circuit and its physicalexpression. By capturing the “logic” of a circuit, thisapproach allows the integration of simulation and physicallayout into the design process. The schematic designprocess then becomes the design entry point for a numberof technologies, from IC design to FPGA and PLDprogramming, to PCB design.

Advanced Schematic incorporates many data managementfacilities that exploit the capabilities of computerizeddesign. For example, each Advanced Schematic sheet is anindependent design file. An automated system links thesesheets when they are used together in a hierarchical project.By recognizing these links, it is possible for the designer toglobally edit and perform design verification across projectsheets, produce a project netlist or generate a bill ofmaterials for an entire project in a single operation.

Another example is the way that parts libraries are managedin Advanced Schematic.

The Advanced Schematic component modelIn Advanced Schematic, component parts are organizedinto families of libraries that correspond to manufacturer’sdata books.

A component stored in the library comprises of one or morecomponent parts descriptions that become therepresentation of the component on the schematic sheet.

Because components can have multiple parts (e.g., theindividual gates in TTL logic components), it is extremelyconvenient to be able to work with each part of a multi-partcomponent individually while laying out the design.

Page 50: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

50

Libraries of component models

A single library component can include multiple graphical partdescriptions, as illustrated in this example of a TTL device. Theindividual parts can be placed independently, anywhere in the projectsheets.

While an image of the component part is “placed” into theschematic, the component information is always stored inthe library. Component creation and editing are alwaysperformed at the library level, not on the sheet. Thisapproach maintains library integrity and allows librarychanges to be used to globally update components inexisting designs.

As parts are placed in sheets, a back-up image of eachcomponent is placed in a special cache, attached to each

Page 51: USRGUIDE

User Guide

51

sheet file. This back-up library allows the user to distributethe schematic sheet files without having to supply thecomplete set of libraries used to create the design. Theback-up library also allows the user to generate apermanent project library for the design. The componentimages stored in the back-up library can be updated fromthe source libraries at any time while the sheet is loaded inthe Schematic Editor. When they are updated a report isgenerate listing updated parts in the cache library.

ConnectivityAn additional major feature of Advanced Schematic is thesystem’s use of connectivity. Connectivity is the ability ofthe software to recognize the physical links between objectsinside the sheet and the ability to associate the logicalconnections that exist between various sheets in a multi-sheet design. Connectivity is also used to anchor certainobjects together. For example, you can drag connectedelectrical items (parts, buses, wires, ports, etc.) withoutbreaking existing connections.

More importantly, connectivity allows the schematic togenerate netlists and perform electrical rules checks.

Page 52: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

52

The Place menu and Wiring Tools palette include all AdvancedSchematic “electrical” objects, which define both logical and physicalconnectivity.

The process of placing electrical objects in the sheet isoften referred to as wiring. This is because the connectivityfeatures allow you to work with electrical objects as thoughyou were physically hooking-up the circuit.

Basic electrical objects, used in wiring your schematicinclude special connective lines that carry signals or powerbetween components, called wires; buses graphicallyrepresent grouped nets; bus entries graphically attach wires

Page 53: USRGUIDE

User Guide

53

to buses; junctions connect tangent or crossed wires andparts that represent the component devices and their pins.

Two other special classes of electrical objects are providedas well. Directives, which are used to indicate simulationpoints, unconnected pins (No ERC) and PCB layoutattributes on individual nets and net identifiers, which areused to indicate electrical connections that are notphysically wired together, for example, connections thatcontinue from one schematic sheet to another in a multi-sheet design.

Net IdentifiersAs described above, net identifier objects supportconnections that are not physically joined by wires. Theseobjects include: net labels that identify common nets on asheet (or globally, across multiple sheets if the userspecifies); ports that identify net connections between twosheets; sheet entries that identify net connections into asub-sheet (referenced by a sheet symbol); and power portswhich are special symbols placed to represent a globalpower (or another user-specified) net.

Hidden pins on parts are a special fifth type of net identifierthat function similarly to power ports. Hidden pins connectto all other hidden pins with the same name and connect toa net of the same name, if present. If “un-hidden” these pinsare not deemed to be connected and must be manuallywired to be included in a netlist.

Using connectivity

MethodsConnectivity is derived from the placement of certainelectrical objects in the sheet and from the placement of netidentifiers. However, not all electrical objects usedplacement to define connective behavior. Some objects use

Page 54: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

54

their physical geometry to establish connections. Otherobjects include logical connectivity in their behavior.

Physical connectivityPhysical connectivity is derived by placing the “hot spots”of any two electrical objects in physical contact. In thesimplest example, a wire touching a component pin isdeemed to be connected to that pin, and AdvancedSchematic can extract that logical connection from thephysical contact between the two items.

In general terms, when the hot spots of any two connectiveobjects “touch” they are deemed to be connected. However,there are some special rules that apply to certain classes ofconnections.

Logical connectivityLogical connectivity depends upon the presence of netidentifiers (net labels, ports, sheet entries, power ports andhidden pins) on the sheet. Logical connectivity does notrequire special placement or physical contact but relies onthe matching of the net names that associate these objectswithin a single sheet or across multiple sheets in a project.Refer to the chapters Multi Sheet Designs and ProjectManagement and Netlists for further information aboutusing logical connectivity.

General rule for connectivityElectrical objects are connected when their electrical “hotspots” are touching. Special cases of connectivity aredescribed below. When the electrical grid is enabled(Options-Document Options) the cursor will jump to thenearest hot spot and change into a “dot” shape. Whenplacing or moving electrical objects, clicking LEFT MOUSE(or releasing LEFT MOUSE when dragging) will establish aconnection when the hot spot is displayed.

Page 55: USRGUIDE

User Guide

55

Special rules for connectivityWire to wire Wires whose ends touch at any angle, butt end-to-end or

have co-linear (overlapping) terminations are deemed to beconnected. Co-linear wires that terminate elsewhere on thesheet are not deemed to be connected. Wires that cross orterminate perpendicularly are not deemed to be connectedunless a junction is placed at their intersection.

Wire to bus Buses are graphical representations of grouped signalsonly, and do not have any special connective properties fornetlisting. Although buses display hot spots when wiringand maintain connections during drags, they so notsimulate electrical connections. Wires are graphicallyconnected to buses using bus entry symbols. Net labelsmust be used to indicate logical connectivity on either sideof the bus connection.

Wire to pin Pins that touch the ends of wires at any angle are deemed tobe connected. Pins that intersect perpendicular wires mustbe connected by placing a junction at that location.Junctions will be automatically inserted where wires crosspins perpendicularly when this option is active (Options-Schematic Preferences menu item).

Wire to port A Wire touching the end of a port is deemed to beconnected.

Wire to sheet entry A Wire touching the end of a sheet entry is deemed to beconnected.

Bus to object Buses are graphical representations of grouped nets onlyand have no special physical properties for netlisting.Logical connectivity (use of net identifier, e.g. net labeland port) is used in these cases to indicate connections oneither side of a bus (See “Net label to bus, below). Notehowever, if a bus is connecting to a port the bus line mustend on the end of the port.

Page 56: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

56

Net label to wire Net labels associate a wire with single net. To achieve thisassociation, the net label must be placed on the same gridpoint as the wire, either vertically or horizontally. Labelscan only be placed on horizontal or vertical lines or at linevertices.

Net label to bus Buses are graphical entities and do not provide physicalconnectivity for netlisting. Logical connectivity for busescan be assigned by placing a net label on the bus.Generally, this net label will include all bus signals, e.g.HA[0..19] represents nets named HA0, HA1, HA2, etc. to HA19.Buses and bus entries do not highlight when the Edit-Select-Net process launcher is used.

Pin to object Pins connect directly to other pins, wires, net labels, sheetentries or ports. Hidden pins can be assigned directly tonets in the Schematic Library Editor. Un-hidden pins canalso connect directly to other sheets, when that sheet isnamed in the part’s Sheet Path field.

Pin to pin Pins are deemed to be connected if they are in contact atany angle.

No ERC No ERC objects are deemed to be connected to pins orwires if they are in contact.

Design verificationDesign verification is a general term for validating thephysical (or electrical) and logical connections in yourdesign. A number of tools are provided that allow you toperform design verification from within the SchematicEditor, by generating reports and by running the ElectricalRule Check (ERC) feature.

Page 57: USRGUIDE

User Guide

57

Working in the multi-server EDA Client environmentallows you to easily switch between your schematicand text files. You can generate netlists, reports andElectrical Rules Checks and examine these side byside with your schematic.

Checking sheets and projectsWhile creating a schematic, a number of useful designverification features are available directly from the sheetworkspace. The Edit-Select-Net and Edit-Select-Connectionprocess launchers can be used to highlight all objectsassociated with a net or a single connection (componentpins do not select in these cases). These process launchersare useful in verifying connections. The Info-Selected Pinsprocess launcher displays a list of all pins connected to thecurrent selection.

Generating reports

Advanced schematic features built-in report generators,which provide design verification and documentation.Details about the processes for generating these reports andthe report formats can be found in the Reports chapter.

Bill of MaterialsThe Reports-Bill of Materials (BOM) feature generates areport for the current active project. Two versions of theBOM report are available. A condensed format that listspart type fields, description fields, quantities of each typeand the designator fields associated with each type. TheCondensed version is produced in a tabulated ASCIIformat.

The Expanded BOM format is user-defined and can includeseveral additional fields: eight (internal) library componenttext fields, 16 part text fields and four package descriptionfields. This Bill of Materials can be generated in CSV

Page 58: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

58

(comma separated value) format, CSV format files can beread directly into spreadsheet or database cells.

Advanced Schematic allows you to designate a CSV Editor(under the Tools menu) which will automatically launch theCSV editor application (e.g. Excel, Lotus 1-2-3, dBase, etc.)and open the CSV format report at the time they aregenerated.

Project Hierarchy reportThe Project Hierarchy process launcher generates a listingof project files for the current active sheet, hierarchical ormulti-sheet flat project. This report outputs in ASCII textformat.

Cross Reference reportThe Reports-Cross Reference process launcher (shortcut: R,C) generates a listing of part types and designator labels,and the sheet location (filename) for each item. The reportis generated for the current active sheet, hierarchical ormulti-sheet flat project. This report outputs in ASCII textformat.

Electrical Rules Check reportElectrical Rules Check (ERC) report is a listing of electrical(and certain logical) violations and warnings for the currentactive project. A wide variety of basic electrical errors arereported. Errors that can be reported include instances ofopen input pins on parts or “shorts” between two differentnets. Users can select the specific rules for a project.“Suppress ERC” symbols can be placed on intentionallyunused pins or at other locations where the user prefersviolations to be ignored by the ERC system.

Users can specify either an “error” or “warning” using agraphical matrix of pin, port and sheet entry conditions.

Page 59: USRGUIDE

User Guide

59

The way net identifiers are used in the design can impactthe electrical validity of connections. For example, globalnet labels (Net Labels and Ports Global option) will join allnets with the same label across multiple sheets, where localnet labels (Only Ports Global option) will only joinelectrical items within a single sheet. Users can specify the“scope” of these net identifiers for electrical rules checks,the same way that they are specified for generating a validnetlist.

Special symbols are overlaid on the sheet, indicating thelocation of the reported conditions when the user specifiesAdd Error Markers. These symbols are cleared from thesheet when the error condition is corrected.

The process of running an ERC is integral toproducing a valid netlist for a project. The presenceof electrical or logical violations will not preventAdvanced Schematic from generating a netlist,however incomplete or invalid. Carefully check andresolve all reported errors prior to netlist generation.

Netlist Compare reportThis report lists the differences between two netlist.Normally, you would generate this report to documentchanges made to a project from one revision to another.This feature works with Protel, Protel 2 and Tango formatnetlists. Among other details, the report lists matched nets,partially matched nets, extra nets in the first or secondnetlist, total nets in each netlist. Output is in ASCII text.

Linking to other Servers and other Applications

NetlistsNetlists provide the “capture” of the schematic captureprocess. Netlists are normally ascii text files. They include;component information (designator, part type and package

Page 60: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

60

information) and all the connectivity information. They canalso include other information, such as simulationparameters or PCB layout information, depending on thenetlist format chosen.

Special links to PCB systemsAdvanced Schematic supports a number of links to PCBsystems beyond basic netlisting.

Back annotationAdvanced Schematic supports back annotation ofdesignator updates based on a “was-is” list generated by thePCB layout package. Advanced PCB and a number of otherlayout packages allow you to re-annotate the PCB on apositional basis, with these new designator assignmentsthen being back annotated to the schematic. The “was-is”information is supplied by a .WAS file. This file is in ASCIItext format.

Forward annotationForward annotation is the process of implementing changesto an existing PCB layout from the schematic editor. Thissystem will allow users to move, add or delete connectionson the schematic sheet. Adding, removing or re-naming ofparts or nets in the schematic is also supported. When theupdated netlist is loaded into Advanced PCB, the systemwill compare the new netlist with the physical design andupdate the PCB to reflect all netlist level changes. This caninclude substitution of component footprints and removalof obsolete routed tracks with conversion back intounrouted (ratsnested) PCB connections.

PCB Layout directiveThe PCB Layout object (supported by OrCAD SDT andPCB) allows the engineer to specify topology, priority anddesign rules for routing on a net-by-net basis. Userdefinable fields for the PCB Layout object include routingtrack width and via size, layer and route priority. Directives

Page 61: USRGUIDE

User Guide

61

are included in the Protel 2 netlist format. Advanced PCB isfully-compatible with the Protel 2 netlist format.

Cross probingIn the EDA Client environment, you can run both AdvancedSchematic and Advanced PCB at the same time.

When a schematic sheet (or project) and its PCB layout areopen at the same time, Advanced Schematic and AdvancedPCB support bi-directional cross probing.

For example, the user can select a part in the schematic, andthe PCB editor will jump to and display the correspondingcomponent. The corresponding PCB-to-AdvancedSchematic cross probe is also supported: pick a componenton the PCB and display the corresponding schematic part.Schematic pin-to-PCB pad cross probing and net label-to-physical net cross probing are also supported.

Page 62: USRGUIDE
Page 63: USRGUIDE

User Guide

63

General Topics

Configuration

Opening, saving and closing files

Components and libraries

Schematic Library Editor

Working in Advanced Schematic

Processes

Objects

Multi-sheet designs and project management

Design verification

Netlists

Fonts

Presentation quality schematics

Hardcopy

Reports

Links with Advanced PCB

Page 64: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

64

Configuration

Advanced Schematic PreferencesPreferences for the Schematic Sheet Editor are accessed viathe Options-Schematic Preferences menu item. ThePreferences dialog box is divided into four Tabs.

Schematic TabThe Pin Options allow the pin name and number to bemoved. The number specified is the distance from the endof the pin (the end closest to the component body). Theunits are hundredths of an inch.

Auto-Junction can be enabled and disabled here. Autojunction will automatically place a junction when youterminate a wire onto another wire.

When you drag components, the wiring is keep orthogonal(corners at 90 degrees). Turning Drag Orthogonal offallows the wires to move at any angle.

The Copy Footprint From / To and the OrCAD Ports checkbox are discussed in the Advanced Topics - OrCADCompatibility.

Select a Default Template File if you want to specify whatsheet template will be used when you open a new schematicsheet.

Graphical Edit TabOptions in this Tab include;

• Clipboard Reference - when you do an Edit-Copy or anEdit-Cut, if this is on, you will be asked to select a

Page 65: USRGUIDE

User Guide

65

reference point. This is useful when copying a section ofcircuit which is to be pasted back into a schematic sheet.This reference point will be the point where the sectionof circuit will be held when pasting.

• Convert Special Strings - enable this check box to seethe contents of the special strings on screen, as they willbe printed. For more information on using special stringsrefer to Advanced Topics - Sheet Templates.

• Display Printer Fonts - Not all fonts are supported on alloutput devices (and Windows will automaticallysubstitute). To see what the text is going to look like onthe printout enable this check box.

• Center of Object - if enabled, when you move or drag anobject you will hold it by its reference point (for objectsthat have one, such as library components or ports), or itscenter (for objects which do not have a reference pointsuch as a rectangle).

• Object’s Electrical Hot Spot - to further aid in ease ofmoving and dragging objects, if this check box isenabled and the object is electrical you will hold it by anelectrical hot spot. These two options can both beenabled if desired.

• Auto Zoom - used in conjunction with jumping to acomponent.

• Undo Stack Size - you can undo this many edits. Set towhat you feel is appropriate (remember, these undo-ableedits are being held in memory).

Default Primitives TabThe default primitives for every object that can be placed inthe Schematic Sheet Editor can be defined here. Defaultvalues are help in the SCH.DFT file. User DFT files can becreated and loaded. Use the permanent check box toprevent these defaults being altered.

Page 66: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

66

Database Links TabAdvanced Schematic supports “hot linking” to databases.This feature allows information in databases to be mappedto component part fields. For more information refer toAdvanced Topics - Linking to Databases.

Schematic SheetsWhen you choose the File-New menu item, a window isopened with an empty sheet displayed in it. Sheet windowsare titled with the current path and file name.

Advanced Schematic gives you extensive control oversheets, including customized sheets and re-usable sheettemplates. These sheet controls allow users to easily createand use sheets customized for specific organizations orpurposes.

To set sheet options, select the Options-Document Optionsmenu item. This will pop up the Document Options dialogbox.

Sheet OptionsThe Document Options dialog box provides control overthe attributes of a sheet, including the sheet style and sheetoptions, the grids, organization information and access tothe system font.

Choosing a sheet sizeAdvanced Schematic allows you to choose from 10standard imperial and metric sheet sizes, or to define acustom sheet size. The maximum custom sheet size is 65inches by 65 inches.

Schematic sheets are conventionally displayed and printedin “landscape” (wide) rather than “portrait” (tall)orientation. Advanced Schematic allows you to display and

Page 67: USRGUIDE

User Guide

67

print your drawings in either orientation. Standard sheetsizes in landscape orientation include:

sizewidth x height (in)width x height (mm)

A 11.00 8.50 279.42 215.90B 17.00 11.00 431.80 279.40C 22.00 17.00 558.80 431.80D 34.00 22.00 863.60 558.80E 44.00 34.00 1078.00 863.60

A4 11.69 8.27 297 210A3 16.54 11.69 420 297A2 23.39 16.54 594 420A1 33.07 23.39 840 594A0 46.80 33.07 1188 840

ORCAD A 9.90 7.90 251.15 200.66ORCAD B 15.40 9.90 391.16 251.15ORCAD C 20.60 15.60 523.24 396.24ORCAD D 32.60 20.60 828.04 523.24ORCAD E 42.80 32.80LETTER 11.00 8.50 215.90LEGAL 14.00 8.50

TABLOID 17.00 11.00

The maximum available work area in a sheet (with theborder hidden) will depend upon the output device. Manyprinters and plotters cannot print to the edge of the sheet, sosome trial and error may be necessary to determine theexact available work area. Because of this, the standardANSI and ISO border specifications cannot be appliedwhen targeting these devices. Advanced Schematic cancompensate for this by allowing you to scale the outputduring printing or plotting.

A smaller work area will be available when sheet bordersare displayed. The default sheet boarder removes 0.2 to 0.4inch (approximately 5 to 10 mm) from the working area,depending upon the sheet size selected.

To choose a sheet size from one of the 10 ANSI or ISO(metric) standard sizes, choose the Options-DocumentOptions menu item to open the Document Options dialog

Page 68: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

68

box, then select from one of the available sheet sizes ordefine a custom sheet size up to 65 inches by 65 inches.

BordersProtel provides two pre-defined borders. Choose either thedefault border or an ANSI standard border that follows theANSI reference grid convention (for additionalinformation, please refer to ANSI standard Y14.1-1980).

Custom borders can be defined in the Document Optionsdialog box. These custom borders can be incorporated intocustom sheet templates which can be saved and applied tosheets at any time.

When defining sheet borders, you should be aware that notall devices can print all the way to the edge of the page. Forexample, laser printers typically reserve a margin of about0.15 inches (4.0 mm) outside the printable area. This canmake it impossible to include all of the standard or ANSIborders when printing at 100% scale using standard sheetsizes, such as “A” or “A4.” You can change the print scaleto accommodate the maximum printable area of yourprinter.

Title blockProtel provides two pre-defined title block formats. Choosethe default title block or an ANSI standard title block that issomewhat larger. Some of the information in title blocks isprovided automatically, e.g., the sheet size, file name andcreation date. Turn the title block off if you wish to drawyour own.

GridsThere are three grids in the Schematic Sheet Editor, thesnap grid, the visible grid and the electrical grid.

The snap grid is the grid that the cursor is locked to whenplacing or manipulating objects on the sheet. This grid

Page 69: USRGUIDE

User Guide

69

should be left on at all times except when specificallyplacing or moving objects that need to be off grid, like text.

The visible grid is the grid you see on the sheet which actsas a visual reference. Typically it is set to be the same as ora multiple of the snap grid.

The electrical grid supports the Guided Wiring feature thatAdvanced Schematic offers. As you move an electricalobject in the workspace and it falls within the electrical gridrange of another electrical object, such that a validconnection could be made, the object you are moving willsnap to the fixed object and a Hot Spot or highlight dot willappear. This dot guides you as to where a valid connectioncan be made. The electrical grid should be set slightlylower than the current snap grid or else it becomes difficultto position electrical objects one snap grid apart.

UnitsBoth the Schematic Sheet Editor and Library Editor have aresolution of 0.01”, or one hundredth of an inch. The unitsdisplayed on the left of the status bar are always hundredthsof an inch, regardless of the sheet style.

OrganizationClicking on the Organization Tab in the Document Optionsdialog box allows you to enter the organization details.Each field here is linked to a special string. An explanationand example of special strings is given in Advanced Topics- Sheet Templates.

Page 70: USRGUIDE
Page 71: USRGUIDE

User Guide

71

Opening, Saving and Closing Files

Opening schematic filesAdvanced Schematic can open any number of schematicsheets into separate windows, limited only by availablememory. The following schematic file formats aresupported: Advanced Schematic (text and binary); ProtelSchematic (DOS version 3) and OrCAD SDT (version 3, 4or 386+) files.

File-Open dialog boxChoosing the File-Open menu item pops up the OpenDocument dialog box. This dialog box is used for openingfiles for any of the Document Editors which are currentlyinstalled.

Page 72: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

72

The correct server must be installed for a document of thattype to be opened in its document editor. For informationon how to install a server refer to the chapter A Quick Tourof EDA Client.

Select the required document editor in the Editor pull down,then set the file Type. Locate the file to be opened in thecorrect directory, select the file and press the Open button.

Information about the specified file (the filename currentlyhighlighted by the selection bar in the File list), is displayedin the bottom of this dialog box.

The File-Open dialog box features a number of controloptions, including direct access to the Windows FileManager (for browsing and modifying directories), andnetworks (for accessing networks and network drives).

Page 73: USRGUIDE

User Guide

73

File masks are non-restrictive when opening files.You can use any file extension for schematic sheets.Advanced Schematic identifies file typesindependently of the extension and converts other filetypes into Advanced Schematic format automatically.

Opening multi-sheet projectsThe File-Open process launcher is used for all file opening,whether it is a single sheet or a multi-sheet project. To openall sheet files associated with a hierarchical or multi-sheetproject, click on the Project check box in the OpenDocument dialog box. For convenience in identifying theMaster (top most) sheet in a multi-sheet project, theextension .PRJ can be applied when saving the Master sheetfile. To open a previously created project:

Select the File-Open menu item. Click on the Projectcheck box. Select Sch in the Editor pull down. Choose afile with the .PRJ extension and click OK. If the projectis hierarchical, you can choose any file in the project toopen that sheet and any sheet that is lower in thehierarchy.

You can also double-click on the master sheet filename inthe Files list. To change directories, double-click on any ofthe available options in the Directories list.

Any number of hierarchical, flat and single sheet projectscan be open simultaneously, limited only by availablememory.

As each sheet of the project loads, an icon for each sheetfile is placed in the Project Manager. The actual documentwindows will cascade to reveal the sheet name in each titlebar.

Any number of projects and individual sheets can beopened, limited only by available memory. If theProject Manager window fills, a scroll bar is added.

Page 74: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

74

Save Options

File-SaveThe File-Save process launcher will save the activedocument with the same file name.

File-Save AsThe File Save As process launcher pops up the File dialogbox. Select the required file type in the Document Typespull down. Masks used to save files are restrictive in thefollowing instances:

.SCH Schematic sheet files (binary format)also: OrCAD SDT 4 (binary format)

.ASC Individual sheet files (text format)also: Schematic library files (text format)

.PRJ Project Master sheet files (optional, foridentification of master sheets, .SCH can besubstituted)

.LIB Schematic library files (binary format).DOT Schematic template files.NET Schematic netlists (Protel, Protel 2)

Save ProjectTo save all the sheets that constitute a hierarchical or multi-sheet flat project, use the File-Save Project processlauncher. To use this process launcher, first move the focusto any sheet in the project by clicking directly on one of thesheets, or the icon representing a sheet in the ProjectManager. Sheets will be saved using the default Protelbinary format. All sheets that belong to the project will besaved.

Save AllThe Save All process launcher can be used to save all of thecurrently open documents (regardless of which documenteditor created it). All

Page 75: USRGUIDE

User Guide

75

files will be saved in the default format for their documenttype.

Close Options

File-CloseThe File-Close process launcher will close the activedocument. If the file has been edited since the last save, theConfirm dialog box will pop up, asking if you would like tosave before exit. It is also possible to cancel and not closethe document.

File-Close ProjectThe File-Close Project process launcher will close all filesassociated with a project. If any of the files have beenedited since the last save, the confirm dialog box will popup, asking if you would like to save before exit. TheConfirm dialog box includes an Apply To All Documentscheck box, so if you would like it to save all the documentsthat need saving (without asking at each one), check thisbox.

Windows-Close AllThe Window-Close All process launcher will close allcurrently open documents. If any of the files have beenedited since the last save, the confirm dialog box will popup, asking if you would like to save before exit. TheConfirm dialog box includes an Apply To All Documentscheck box, so if you would like it to save all the documentsthat need saving (without asking at each one), check thisbox.

Page 76: USRGUIDE
Page 77: USRGUIDE

User Guide

77

Components and Libraries

Efficient use and management of Advanced Schematiclibraries requires an understanding of the relationshipbetween libraries, components and parts. Libraries aredatabases which store component descriptions. Componentdescriptions include all library level data about anindividual component and consist of one or more parts,such as a 74LS00 which contains four parts, a capacitorwhich has one part, or a relay which may be made up of acoil part and a contact part.

Components are created and modified in the SchematicLibrary Editor, an independent document editor thatincludes tools for managing and editing libraries. TheSchematic Sheet Editor and the Schematic Library Editorcan have documents open simultaneously within the EDAClient environment, with special features providingconvenient links between sheet and library processes. Forexample, you can move directly from a part symbol on thesheet to editing its component information inside the sourcelibrary.

What are Advanced Schematic libraries?Advanced Schematic is delivered with extensivecomponent libraries that include conventional descriptions,ANSI-IEEE and DeMorgan equivalents. The SchematicLibrary Editor is provided to allow the user to managelibrary data, create new components, move and copycomponents between libraries, merge libraries, etc. Thechapter, Schematic Library Editor, documents the generalfeatures and use of this editor.

Advanced Schematic libraries consist of componentdescriptions, made up of the individual parts that are placed

Page 78: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

78

in schematic sheets. Components can have one or manyparts (e.g., the gates that comprise a multi-part componentlike a 74LS00 in the TTL library).

What is a Component and what is a Part?When a component part is placed in a schematic sheet, thedisplayed version of the part is an instance (or image) of thelibrary version only. The actual component descriptionexists only in a library database. This means thatcomponents and their parts are changed or edited only atthe library level -- never at the sheet level. Library levelchanges are globally applied to each instance of a partwhen a sheet is updated.

Restricting component editing to the SchematicLibrary Editor helps to protect data integrity incomponent libraries, particularly where commonlibraries are shared by multiple users. BecauseSchematic Library Editor access is “on-line” thisstructure imposes no significant penalty on users.Additionally, users can update all instances of a partin open sheets with a single library editor action(Tools-Update Schematic process launcher).

Accessing ComponentsTo access the components in libraries, the libraries mustfirst be added in the Schematic Sheet Editor. Libraries areopened and removed via the Add / Remove Library processlauncher (Tools menu or the button in the Schematic SheetEditor Panel). This pops up the Change Library List dialogbox where new libraries can be added and open onesremoved from the Current File List. The only limit on thenumber of libraries that can be added is the memoryavailable in your computer.

Page 79: USRGUIDE

User Guide

79

Once libraries have been added, parts from those librariescan be placed on the sheet.

Adding and Removing LibrariesLaunching the Add / Remove Library process pops up theChange Library File List dialog box.

This dialog box includes the following features and options.

File NameThis window lists the name of the highlighted libraryfrom the File window, described below. You can typethe desired library name, if known, directly into thiswindow. The current path and directory are also shown.FileThis window lists files in the current directory thatmatch the current file mask used in the File Namewindow. You can use this feature to specify the file type,by extension. Advanced Schematic does not restrict theuse of extensions to identify library types. AdvancedSchematic, OrCAD SDT 3/4 libraries and ProtelSchematic 3.x libraries can be loaded (both indecompiled .SRC format).

Page 80: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

80

File TypesChoose from a pre-defined mask for loading library filesor click Edit to add a new mask type to the list.DirectoriesDouble click in this window to change the current pathand directory as you search for the desired library.Current File ListThis window lists all currently loaded libraries and isupdated as libraries and added or removed from the list.

To add a library to the current list:

1. Move the selection bar through the files listed in theFiles window to highlight the desired library;

2. Click the Add button. The library will be added to theCurrent File List window.

To remove a library from the current list:

1. Move the selection bar through the Current File Listto highlight the desired library;

2. Click Remove;

3. Click OK to close the Library List window and re-setthe updated library list.

Page 81: USRGUIDE

User Guide

81

Placing Parts

Parts can be placed by selecting them in the SchematicSheet Editor Panel and pressing the Place button.

Before actually placing the part on the sheet you can edit itsattributes. To do this press the TAB key while thecomponent is “floating” on the cursor. You will bepresented with the Edit Part dialog box. If you set thedesignator now and continue to place instances of the samepart the designator will auto-increment. While thecomponent is floating on the cursor it can be rotated bypressing the SPACEBAR, and flipped along the X or Y axis bypressing the X or Y key.

You can also place parts using the Place Part processlauncher. This can be accessed in the Place menu, bypressing the button on the Wiring toolbar or the keyboardshortcut keys (P, P). When placing parts from a multi-partcomponent, there is no need to specify which part it is (eg:U1:A), the alpha suffix is added automatically.

Page 82: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

82

Part AttributesLike all objects in Advanced Schematic, parts have a set ofattributes associated with them. Some of these attributescan only be defined while editing the component in theLibrary Editor and therefore apply to all parts of thecomponent, some can only be defined in the SchematicSheet Editor and are associated with that instance of thepart, and some can be defined in either.

To change any part, double-click on the placed part or usethe Edit-Change process launcher. Each editable attributecan be globally edited, with changes applied to some, or allof the parts on the sheet.

About component textCertain text fields are included in netlists, those beingincluded depends on the netlist format. For example, theProtel format netlist, which can be loaded into AdvancedPCB includes the designator (or label), part type(description or component value) and footprint (componentpackage). Depending on the netlist format, these may belimited in the number of characters supported. These netlistfields may or may not support empty spaces and/or be casesensitive.

When a part is placed on a sheet the designator, part typeand other text fields created at placement can be eitherhidden, displayed or moved relative the part position andorientation. Displayed text supports any TrueType font,including user-definable size and style.

Parts have two sets of special text fields, eight library textfields whose values are entered at the library level andsixteen part text fields whose values are entered at the sheetlevel when the part is placed.

Page 83: USRGUIDE

User Guide

83

Library ReferenceA special text field is reserved for the part’s LibraryReference. This field can be up to 255 characters long andis included in Bill of Materials reports. This is the name ofthe component in the Library.

FootprintFour fields are provided for naming PCB patterns for thecomponent. These can be pre-assigned in the Library Editoror a value can be entered when the part is placed on thesheet. Four fields allow the user to nominate alternatepatterns for SMD versions, etc.

For the netlist to load successfully into a PCB designpackage, this field must contain the name of a PCBcomponent that exists in a PCB library. This PCBlibrary must be open when the netlist is being loaded.

DesignatorA default prefix can be defined for the part designator inthe library editor. The user can override this defaultmanually, when placing or editing parts on the sheet. If noinitial numeric value is defined for a designator prefix, itwill be placed as U?, R?, etc. If the designator is assignedbefore the part is placed (press the TAB key while thecomponent is floating on the cursor), the designators willincrement automatically (R1, R2 etc) as further parts areplaced. Complex cases for multi-part components are alsosupported, yielding: U1:A, U1:B, U1:C, U1:D, etc. TheTools-Annotate process launcher automatically re-numbersall designators in a project.

Part typeA part type text field is provided for the component partdescription. This field can be up to 255 characters long andis included in Bill of Materials reports. This field is where

Page 84: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

84

you enter the value of a generic component, say 4.7K or220nF.

Sheet PathParts on the schematic sheet can be made to behave as sheetsymbols rather than component parts. When they are in thismode, the nets connecting to their pins connect to matchingports on the sheet below. To get a part to behave as a sheetsymbol, you specify the sheet that exists below in the SheetPath field and enable the descend into sheet parts option inthe Netlist Creation dialog box. When a component isconfigured to behave as a sheet symbol it does not appearin the netlist.

Library text fieldsEach library component has eight user-definable text fields.These fields can hold up to 255 characters each. Librarytext fields cannot be edited in parts placed in the schematicsheet, but can be viewed and are automatically included inthe CSV format Bill of Material.

Part text fieldsIn addition to the eight library component text fields,sixteen additional user-definable fields are available foreach part, at the sheet level. These fields can be displayedor hidden (click Hidden Fields in the Change Componentdialog box) and are editable on the sheet, with userdefinable fonts, sizes and colors. These fields can be up to255 characters long and are automatically included in CSVformat Bill of Materials reports.

The names of part text fields can be defined in the LibraryEditor. Up to 255 characters can be used, but only the endof the character string will be displayed in the Part dialogbox if the length of the string exceeds the display area.There is room for 14 characters and/or spaces, when 12point Helvetica is used as the dialog box font. Custom field

Page 85: USRGUIDE

User Guide

85

names are not used for column headers in CSV format Billof Material reports.

DescriptionA field of up to 255 characters is provided for a textdescription of the component. Text for this field is enteredin the Component Text Fields dialog box in the LibraryEditor and can be viewed in the Edit Part dialog box in theSchematic Sheet Editor. This field is included in the CSVformat Bill of Material.

ColorsPart outline, pin color and fill colors (if part includesclosed rectangles, filled arcs or polygon graphics) are userselectable attributes. If part graphics are un-filled, changesmade to the Fill Color field will be ignored. Default colorscan be assigned to each part at the library editor level, butthese assignments can be overridden when editing placedparts. To apply the local (rather than default library) colors,click Local Colors in the Edit Part dialog box.

Hidden pinsThe Hide/Display status of all hidden pins on a part can bechanged at any time. Any pin can be defined as hidden inthe library editor. Normally, hidden pins are used forcomponent power nets. When hidden, these pins aredeemed to be connected to nets with the same name duringnetlisting. If hidden pins are displayed they then must bewired manually. If the hidden pins on a multi-partcomponent are being displayed, then the hidden pins on allparts of that component (eg: U2:A, U2:B, U2:C, U2:D) mustbe displayed.

Page 86: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

86

How Parts are Saved with the DesignTo make component access efficient, Advanced Schematicutilizes a special component cache. The cache is essentiallya temporary library, created in the computer’s memory. Asingle cache is maintained for all opened sheets and thiscache holds a copy of each type of component placed inany sheet in each project.

Whenever you select a part from a library to place in asheet, the cache is checked first. If it contains a part with amatching library reference, an instance of the part in thecache is used (the part in the library is not used). If there isno match in the cache, then the part is loaded from thelibrary into the cache.

Each time any sheet in the project is saved, the cache isused to generate a hidden backup library. This file includesa “read only” version of the library component for each parton the sheet. This backup library allows users to supplyschematic sheet files without having to distribute theircomponent libraries.

It is useful to note that the cache holds copies of all thecomponents currently “in use” in the environment. As youopen another project, all of its components are copied fromthe sheet back-up libraries into the cache. If you removesheets or close projects the components in those projectsare not cleared from the cache. The cache is cleared when

Page 87: USRGUIDE

User Guide

87

you exit the Schematic Editor.As parts are placed in a sheet, their descriptions are stored in atemporary cache. When the project is saved, the cache is used to createa backup library, attached to each sheet file. This allows sheets to bedistributed and viewed without libraries.

In extreme cases, where many sheets are being loadedduring a session, it may be possible to fill the cache tothe extent where system performance begins to slow.If this happens, save your projects, exit the editor andre-start the application.

Project LibrariesAnother benefit of caching is the ability to archive thecache contents into a project library. Because the sourcelibraries may change over time, archiving provides aconvenient way of being able to work with an accurateversion of the project at some future date. The Make ProjectLibrary process launcher generates a project library basedon the current sheet back-up library.

Updating PartsThe Update Parts In Cache process launcher compares theparts in the cache with parts of the same name in thecurrently open libraries. If any part is found to be different,the part in the cache is updated. All instances of theseupdates are automatically reflected on the sheets.

This process allows changes in current source libraries tobe globally applied to every instance of all updatedcomponents in an entire project.

Updates of parts from schematic libraries are recorded in areport file. When Update Parts In Cache is executed, areport file is generated which lists parts that were updated.This list is automatically saved and displayed by the Text

Page 88: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

88

Expert editor. The report only includes components thatwere actually changed.

Page 89: USRGUIDE

User Guide

89

Library Editor

The Library Editor is the second document editor providedby the Advanced Schematic server. Where the SchematicSheet Editor is used for capturing the schematic, the LibraryEditor is used to create and modify the components used inthose schematics. It also includes processes to aid in librarymanagement. When you open a library in the SchematicSheet Editor the components are available for placement inyour sheet, but cannot be edited. When you open a libraryin the Library Editor, the components are available forediting.

LibrariesProtel provides an extensive suite of libraries withAdvanced Schematic, containing over 15,000 components.

Page 90: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

90

Many of these libraries are structured around the majorcomponent manufacturers’ data books. There is a library ofcommon generic components called DEVICE.LIB as well asspecial purpose SPICE, PSPICE and HP-EEsof simulationlibraries. Vector component versions of the Protel DOSSchematic libraries are provided. These can be identified bythe D_ in front of the library name.

Opening LibrariesLibraries are opened in the Library Editor in the same waydocuments are opened in all servers in EDA Client, via theFile-Open process launcher. The only limit on the numberof libraries you have open is the available memory in yourcomputer. Each open library will appear in a separatewindow.

CreatingTo create a new library, use the File-New process launcher.A library will be opened with the name SCHLIB_1.LIB. Asa library is a set of components, it can not exist without atleast one component. So when you create a new library, anempty component sheet COMPONENT_1 will be presented.To save this library with a name of you choice, use the File-Save As process launcher. To rename the component with aname of your choice, use the Tools-Rename Componentprocess launcher.

Page 91: USRGUIDE

User Guide

91

Components and Parts

A library is a set of components. Think of the component asthe physical device. Each of these components can then bemade up of one or more parts. A resistor component wouldhave one part, whereas a resistor network might have eightparts.

The partitioning of components into parts is entirely up tothe designer. You may wish to draw the relay coil as onepart and the contacts as another, or it might be moreappropriate to draw the whole relay as one part. A four pinconnector could be drawn as one part, or it could be drawnas four parts. Each part of a component is drawn on a

Page 92: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

92

separate sheet. To add a new part to a component, select theTools-New Part process launcher.

As well being able to have more than one part, a componentcan have up to three modes, Normal, De-Morgan and IEEE.Each mode is drawn on a separate sheet. The preferredmode is selected when the part is placed on the schematicsheet, with the default being normal.

Creating and EditingProcesses to work with components and parts can beaccessed through the Tools menu. When you launch theprocess to create a new component you will be presentedwith an empty component sheet, titled COMPONENT_1.Always build the component near the sheet origin, which isin the center of the sheet (signified by the heavier gridlines).

Components are draw with the drawing tools provided,accessed via the Drawing toolbar or the Place menu. Thereare a number of solid object and polyline drawing toolsprovided.

Component PinsComponent pins give a component its electrical properties.Pins have a number of attributes, which can be set in the Pindialog box. To set the attributes prior to placing the pin,press the TAB key while the pin is floating on the cursor. Toset them after placing the pin, double click on the pin, orclick once on the pin in the pin list in the panel.

Each component pin must have a unique number. The pinname is optional, except when the pin is going to be hidden.A hidden pin is automatically connected to other hiddenpins with the same name and to nets with the same name,when the netlist is created. When placing pins that arespecified as hidden, make sure the Hidden Pins check boxin the panel is checked (or use the View-Show Hidden Pinsmenu item) if you wish to see them after placement. Pins

Page 93: USRGUIDE

User Guide

93

that are defined as hidden on the library component can be“un-hidden” for any part placed in a schematic sheet.

The Electrical Type attribute of a pin is used when youperform an Electrical Rule Check. It is not used whencreating a netlist. Set this attribute correctly if you intend touse the Electrical Rule Check feature.

Only one end of a pin has electrical meaning, the “hotend”. When placing a pin the hot end is away fromthe cursor cross hair. The pin name always appears atthe cold end of the pin. Always place pins with the hotend away from the component body.

Component DescriptionAs well as its graphical definition, each component has anumber of text fields associated with it. The Tools-Description process launcher will pop up the ComponentText Fields dialog box.

FootprintFour fields are provided for naming PCB patterns for thecomponent. If these are not pre-assigned in the LibraryEditor a value can be entered when the part is placed on thesheet. Four fields allow the user to nominate alternatepatterns for SMD versions, etc.

For the netlist to load successfully into a PCB designpackage, this field must contain the name of a PCBcomponent that exists in a PCB library. This PCBlibrary must be open when the netlist is being loaded.

Default DesignatorA default prefix can be defined for the part designator. Thedefault designator would typically take the form R?, C?, U?and so on.

Page 94: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

94

Sheet Part FilenameParts on the schematic sheet can be made to behave as sheetsymbols rather than component parts. When they are in thismode, the nets connecting to their pins connect to matchingports on the sheet below. To get a part to behave as a sheetsymbol, you specify the sheet that exists below in the SheetPart Filename field and enable the descend into sheet partsoption in the Netlist Creation dialog box. This filename canalso be entered once the part is placed on the schematicsheet.

Library text fieldsEach library component has eight user-definable text fields.These fields can hold up to 255 characters each. Librarytext fields cannot be edited once he part has been placed inthe schematic sheet, but can be viewed and areautomatically included in the CSV format Bill of Material.

Part text fieldsThe names of the sixteen part text fields can be defined inthe Component Text Fields dialog box. Up to 255characters can be used, but only the end of the characterstring will be displayed in the Edit Part dialog box if thelength of the string exceeds the display area. There is roomfor 14 characters and/or spaces, when 12 point Helvetica isused as the dialog box font. Custom field names are notused for column headers in CSV format Bill of Materialreports.

DescriptionA field of up to 255 characters is provided for a textdescription of the component. Component searches can bedone on the contents of the description field.

Grouping ComponentsMany components share the same packaging -- they haveidentical graphics and pin numbers, but exist as individualnames in libraries. Perhaps these are identical devices from

Page 95: USRGUIDE

User Guide

95

different manufacturers, or components that share the samepackages but vary on some specification, such as a 120nsversus 80ns RAMs. While it is convenient to access theseotherwise duplicate parts using either description, it wouldbe inefficient to maintain a separate graphical version ofeach duplicate.

Advanced Schematic uses the concept of componentgroups to associate multiple component names with a singledescription stored in the library. This keeps librariesefficient and manageable. For example, while the TTLlibrary contains nearly 1800 component names, thegraphical and data descriptions that represent thesecomponents number only about six hundred.

Copying ComponentsComponents can be copied within a library or betweenlibraries via the Copy Component process launcher.Selecting this process launcher pops up the DestinationLibrary dialog box where you can select the same library oranother library. Once you have selected a library andclicked OK, the component is copied. If there is only onelibrary open this dialog box does not pop up.

When you are copying a component within a library, youmust perform an action which causes the Components list inthe panel to be refreshed. Switch to another library (orserver) and back, or change the mask field. Once this list isrefreshed, the component you copied will appear twice.One of these can then be re-named.

Updating Your SchematicAfter editing components in the Library Editor there are twoways of passing these updates across to your schematicsheets.

Page 96: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

96

Updating schematic sheets can only be done from thelibraries on your disk, not from the copy of the librarywhich you have open in memory. So remember,always save the library before attempting to updatethe schematic.

From the Library Editor, the Update Schematic processlauncher will update all instances (on all open sheets) of theactive component. The active component is the componentcurrently being displayed in the Library Editor.

From the Schematic Sheet Editor, the Update Parts in Cacheprocess launcher will update all parts (on all open sheets)that are different from those in the libraries that arecurrently open (libraries that are open in the SchematicSheet Editor).

ReportsThere are three reports that can be generated in the LibraryEditor.

ComponentThis report lists all the information available for the activecomponent. This includes; the number of parts, the groupnames and the pin details for each part in the component.This report has the file extension CMP.

LibraryThis report lists each component in the library and itsdescription. This report has the file extension REP.

Page 97: USRGUIDE

User Guide

97

Component Rule Check

The Component Rule Check is used as an aid in componentverification. Set the attributes you wish to test for, click OKand a report will be generated and opened in Text Expert.This report has the file extension ERR.

Page 98: USRGUIDE
Page 99: USRGUIDE

User Guide

99

Working in Advanced Schematic

EDA Client behaves like any application running in theWindows environment. It can be sized, or it can bemaximized to occupy the entire screen. Client can havemultiple documents open and you can easily move betweenthem. Where EDA Client differs from other applications isthat different types of documents can be worked on in theone environment. These documents are created by differentdocument editors. These document editors are provided byservers. So rather than having to move across to anotherapplication to perform a different task on your design (say,from schematic capture to analog simulation), the varioustasks can be performed in the one environment. There aremany advantages to this approach, read the chapter A QuickTour of EDA Client for more information on the Clientserver architecture.

The Advanced Schematic server includes two documenteditors, the Schematic Sheet Editor and the Library Editor.Working in either of these document editors is quite similar,you build your design from the set of objects provided,placing these objects on a sheet. The strategies used forplacing objects, editing their attributes, positioning anddeleting them on the sheet, and so on, are common to bothdocument editors. In essence, the way you work in eithereditor is the same, what you do in each editor is different.

In the Library Editor you create, edit and validatecomponents and component libraries. In the SchematicSheet Editor you create, edit and validate schematics.

Each of these editors makes use of the facilities provided byEDA Client. Each has a menu bar, toolbars and a panel andeach uses the status bar and command status bar.

Page 100: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

100

Organizing the WorkspaceThe application and document windows can be sized andpositioned like any other Windows application. Refer toyour Windows User’s Guide for tips.

Through the View menu you can toggle the ProjectManager, the Editor Panel, the Editor Tabs and the statusbars on and off. Toolbars for each document editor can betoggled on and off in the Customize Resources dialog box(Client menu-Customize).

The Project Manager can be dragged to either side of theworkspace, the Editor Tabs can be dragged to any edge ofthe workspace and the toolbars can also be positioned onany edge of the workspace, or float in the workspace. For amore clues on organizing and editing workspace resourcesread the chapters A Quick Tour of EDA Client and ResourceManagement.

Changing Your View of the SheetEach sheet you open will appear in its own window. Youlook “through” this window to view your sheet. You canbring the sheet closer to you (zoom in) or move the sheetaway (zoom out). The View menu provides a number ofways of changing you view of the document, including a FitAll Objects option, where the sheet will be zoomed to fit allthe placed objects, and a Fit Document, where the entiresheet will be displayed. Shortcut keys to change your viewinclude;

• PAGE UP to zoom in• PAGE DOWN to zoom out• HOME to re-center the screen at the current cursor

position• END to refresh the screen

Page 101: USRGUIDE

User Guide

101

Moving around the Sheet

PanningIf the sheet is zoomed such that you can not see the entiresheet, scroll bars are provided to allow you to scroll aroundthe sheet. These scroll bars have a sliding button, which youcan click and drag to scroll up and down or left and rightacross your sheet. The position of the sliding buttons givesan indication of what portion of the sheet you are currentlyviewing. Click above or below the sliding button to scrollacross the sheet in large steps, or click on the arrows at eachend of the scroll bars to scroll across in small steps. Whenthe sheet is zoomed such that you can see the entire sheet,the scroll bars are removed.

Scroll bars provide one way of moving around the sheet.The other way to move around the sheet is autopanning.Autopanning is enabled whenever you have a crosshaircursor. You have a crosshair cursor whenever you perform“edit” type operations like placing, selecting, moving ordeleting objects. This cursor can be moved either bymoving the mouse or pressing the arrow keys on thekeyboard. If the cursor is moved such that it hits thewindow frame, you will pan across the sheet. To autopan athigher speed, hold the SHIFT key whilst panning. The speedat which you autopan can be altered by changing the StepSize and Shift Step Size in the Graphical Edit Tab in thePreferences dialog box (Options-Schematic Preferences).Here you can also change the style of autopanning as well,choosing either a Fixed Size Jump, where the sheet movesover by the current step size, or Re-Center where the sheetshifts in half screen increments and re-centers the cursor.

Page 102: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

102

Browsing

The Bottom section of the Schematic Sheet Editor Panel canbe used for browsing through the current sheet or the wholeproject (check the Whole Project check box in the panel).Use the pull down to select what you would like to browsby. You can browse by any of the object types available inthe Schematic Editor. The bottom of the browser has threebuttons, Text, Jump and Edit. Select an item from thebrowse list before using these buttons.

• The Jump button will jump you to the selected object,centering it in the window.

• The Text button will jump you to the selected object andthen pop up the Change Text Field For Part dialog box ifthe object has a text field, allowing you to edit the text.

• The Edit button will jump you to the selected object andthen pop up the object’s attribute dialog box, allowingyou to edit any of the objects attributes.

• Use the Update List button to refresh the browse list priorto browsing.

• When you select an item in the list, information aboutthat item will appear on the Status Bar.

Page 103: USRGUIDE

User Guide

103

JumpingThe Jump process launcher (shortcut: J) options allow youto quickly move the cursor to a pre-determined coordinate.This can save you from having to constantly zoom in andout to navigate around your design and is particularlyuseful for large or complex layouts.

The current zoom setting remains unchanged whenjumping, so it may be desirable to zoom-in prior tojumping to the new location

OriginJumps to the absolute (0,0) coordinate. In the SchematicSheet Editor this is the lower-left corner of theworkspace. In the Library Editor it is the center of thesheet.New LocationThis option allows you to type in the desired coordinatesfor the jump.

When the Jump To Location dialog box pops up theX-Location will be highlighted. As it is highlighted,whatever you type will replace the current value sothere is no need to click the cursor in the field withthe mouse. After you have typed in the desired Xcoordinate, press the TAB key. This will move thecursor into the Y-coordinate and highlight the value.Again, just type in the desired value, then press enter.The cursor will jump to the specified location (and themouse was not used).

Location MarkersTen user-definable location markers are provided, whichallow you to move to a pre-determined position in eachsheet, with two key strokes. These markers can be placed inthe sheet at any time, using the Edit-Set Location Marksmenu (shortcut: E, K, 1-10). The coordinates are stored foreach of ten locations.

Page 104: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

104

Jumping to locationsWhen any of 10 available location markers have been set(see above), the Edit-Jump menu (shortcut: J 1-10) can beused to jump to any of the pre-set locations..

Moving Around the ProjectThe Project Manager can be used to navigate through thesheets of a project. There are also two buttons on the maintoolbar, Up Hierarchy and Down Hierarchy, which areexcellent for tracing a net up and down through a project.For a complete explanation of these features, refer to thechapter Multi-sheet Design and Project Management, Toolfor Working with Hierarchy.

Page 105: USRGUIDE

User Guide

105

Frequently Used Shortcut Keys• SPACEBAR to abort screen re-draws• X, A to de-select all• V, D to zoom to fit the sheet• V, F to zoom to fit all placed objects• PAGE UP to zoom in (zooms in around the cursor, so

position the cursor first)• PAGE DOWN to zoom out• HOME to re-center the screen at the current cursor

position• END to refresh the screen• TAB while an object is floating on the cursor to edit its

attributes prior to placement.• SPACEBAR whilst placing an object to rotate it by 90

degrees• X whilst placing an object to flip it along the X axis• Y whilst placing an object to flip it along the Y axis• DELETE whilst laying a wire/bus/line/polygon to delete

the last vertex• SPACEBAR whilst laying a wire/bus/line to step through

the placement modes• ESC to escape from what you are doing when you change

your mind• CTRL+TAB to switch between open documents in EDA

Client• ALT+TAB to switch between open applications in

Windows• F1 when you have a crosshair cursor to pop up a list of

shortcut keys

Page 106: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

106

Page 107: USRGUIDE

User Guide

107

Processes

The Advanced Schematic environment, whether creatingand editing schematic sheets, or working in the libraryeditor, consists of two basic types of elements: objects thatdescribe the data in a design and processes, which are usedby the system or the user to create, modify, save and reporton the data objects.

Objects include the sheet workspace, components, pins,wires, lines, graphical images and so on. Objects are alsoreferred to as primitives.

What is a Process?A process can be thought of as the software executing asequence of jobs. This job may be something simple, likerefreshing the screen, or it may be more complex, likeupdating the attributes of a component.

Any action or operation that is performed in AdvancedSchematic is carried out by a process. When the Place-Wiremenu item is selected, the PlaceWire process is launched.The wire then is placed by the user interacting with thePlaceWire process. Selecting the View-Fit Document menuitem launches the ZoomDocument process, which changesthe view to display the entire sheet. Menu items, toolbarbuttons and shortcut keys launch a process (and are calledProcess Launchers), the action, or job, is performed by theprocess.

Each process is identified by a unique Process Identifier.The process identifier includes the server name and theprocess name, separated by a colon. For the two processnames mentioned above, the syntax is;

Page 108: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

108

Sch:PlaceWire

Sch:ZoomDocument

A definition of each process provided by EDA Client andeach server can be found in the relevant Reference Manual.Each of the process launcher Edit dialog boxes includes anInfo button. Press this to pop up a Help window with adescription of that process.

Launching a ProcessSchematic processes are launched by passing the processidentifier to the schematic server. The server then carriesout that process. When the schematic server receives theprocess identifier it first checks that it is valid, thendepending on the mode, invokes the process accordingly.To pass the process identifier to the server, a processlauncher is used. Process launchers include;

• menu items• toolbar buttons• keyboard shortcut keys• process containersWhen a menu item is selected, such as Place Wire, theprocess identifier linked to that menu item is passed to theSchematic Server, along with any parameters that havebeen defined.

Advanced Schematic provides a powerful productivityenhancement by allowing any process available inAdvanced Schematic to be mapped to any process launcher.This allows you to define your own menus, your owntoolbars and your own shortcut keys. For tips on editingmenus, toolbars and shortcut keys refer to the chapter AQuick Tour of EDA Client. For an overview of resources,refer to the Resources chapter

Page 109: USRGUIDE

User Guide

109

ModeProcesses can run in one of three modes. The mode ispassed to the process as a parameter. The three modes are;

• execute - this is the default mode and is assumed if nomode parameter is passed. In this mode the process willexecute its function, if necessary popping up a dialogbox or requesting a mouse action if the process requiresparameters.

• Configure - selecting this mode will result in the processrequesting its parameters (if a process has parameters).This will be done via a dialog box or a mouse action inthe workspace. If this mode is chosen the process willonly get the parameters, it will not execute.

• Get configuration - selecting this mode will result in theprocess returning its current parameter values. This canonly be done from a macro or a process container.

ParametersProcesses in Advanced Schematic are parametric. Aparametric process supports the passing of parametervalues both to and from the process. Parameter values canbe passed when the process is launched by entering theminto the Parameters text field of a process launcher editingdialog box (eg, the Edit Menu dialog box). They can also bepassed by a macro or setup in a process container.

The syntax for passing process parameter values via theParameters text field is parameter = value. Each parameteris then separated by the vertical bar (or pipe) symbol. It isnot necessary to list parameters in any order, nor is itnecessary to pass every possible parameter.

For information on the parameters of each process refer tothe reference manual or press the Info button in the EditMenu, Edit button or Edit Keyboard Shortcut dialog box.

For information on passing parameters from macros, referto the Macros chapter.

Page 110: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

110

Menu barThe Menu bar displays the main menus for AdvancedSchematic: File, Edit, View, Place, Tools, Options, Reports,Window and Help.

Pop-up menusAdvanced Schematic includes special shortcut keyassignments for accessing menus. For example, pressing Ewill pop up the Edit menu, pressing M will pop up the Movesub-menu. This provides a convenient way to access menusdirectly from the keyboard. The underlined letter in a menuis the shortcut key for that menu or menu item.

MenusAdvanced Schematic menu items are organized to be asconsistent with the Windows model as possible. This meansthat standardized operations, such as opening and savingfiles, printing or using standardized Windows editingoperations such as Cut or Paste are handled in AdvancedSchematic using the same methods that other Windowsapplications use. This makes the software more productivein an integrated environment, where the user is typicallyworking with a number of Windows applications.

Menus can be edited and new menus created. Any processcurrently available in EDA Client can be linked to anymenu item. Refer to the chapter A Quick Tour of EDA Clientfor tips on how to edit menus.

FileFile menu items are used to; create new files, open files orentire projects, close files, save the current file or project,save the current file under a new filename, save all openfiles, print the current file or project, export and importfrom databases, send mail or exit the Advanced Schematicprogram.

Page 111: USRGUIDE

User Guide

111

EditEdit menu items are used to make changes to the currentsheet, including: Undo or redo actions; cut, copy, paste orclear a selection; make selections of objects in the window;de-select objects; manipulate and delete objects; work withtext; jump to sheet locations.

ViewView menu items are used to change the display area in thecurrent document window and to change the “view” of theenvironment by toggling things such as panels and statusbars on and off.

PlacePlace menu items are used to place any of the graphical andelectrical objects available in Advanced Schematic, on theactive sheet.

ToolsThe Tools menu in the Schematic Editor includes tools forworking at the document level - working with libraries,hierarchy, design annotation, netlist generation, electricalrule checks, placing Process Containers and cross probingto a PCB.

In the Library Editor, the Tools menu includes tools forworking with components and parts.

OptionsOptions menu items are used to change schematicpreferences and document options update, set or removesheet templates and save or open user configuration files.

ReportsThe Reports menu allows you to examine the status of the“system” (the Windows environment), get a list of selected

Page 112: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

112

pins and the components they belong to, and generate anumber of reports, a Bill of Materials, Project Hierarchy,Cross Reference and also do a comparison of two netlists.

The Library Editor can produce reports on the activecomponent or library and perform a Component RuleCheck.

WindowWindow menu items are used to re-arrange or close all ofthe current open document windows. You can also makeanother document active via the Windows menu.

HelpHelp menu items are used to open Windows help files,direct the user to specific help topics and provideinformation about the current application.

Details about each process can be found in theAdvanced Schematic Reference and the On-line Helpsystem.

Refer to A Quick Tour of EDA Client for clues on howto create and edit menus.

ToolbarsTool buttons are shortcuts for launching frequently usedprocesses. Advanced Schematic includes a total of sixtoolbars, three for each document editor.

All toolbars in the EDA Client environment can be fixed toany side of the workspace or set to be floating, where theycan be re- positioned anywhere in the environment.

New toolbars can be created and existing toolbars edited,linking any of the processes currently available in EDA

Page 113: USRGUIDE

User Guide

113

Client to any button. Refer to the chapter A Quick Tour ofEDA Client for tips on how to edit toolbars.

All Advanced Schematic processes can be linked totoolbars (in fact any process available in the Clientenvironment can be linked to any toolbar in any server).Assigning frequently used processes to tool buttonsprovides a convenient shortcut, which can speed editing ofa schematic or component creation in the library editor.Many of the default tool button assignments are shortcutsfor Place menu items.

Schematic Editor, Library Editor main toolbarsThe main toolbar, displayed across the top of bothapplication windows, includes a number of general purposetools. Differences in the two applications reflect the specialrequirements of sheet level and library level editing. Thesemain tool bars can be repositioned by the user to any side ofthe Client workspace, and can also be set to floating or be

hidden.Wiring and Drawing Tool Bars can be displayed or hidden while using theSchematic Editor.

Wiring toolsIncludes tools for creating and placing objects thatrepresent the electrical elements of a schematic. Electricalobjects are objects that have electrical meaning.

These include wires, buses, junctions, parts. Advancedschematic recognizes the connections that exist when theseobjects are graphically joined, and uses this information to

Page 114: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

114

generate netlists, maintain connections when items aremoved and perform electrical rules checking.

Drawing toolsIncludes tools for creating graphical objects, includingsingle line text and text frames. This set of graphical objectsdo not have electrical meaning.

Examples of non-electrical items include lines, polygons,bezier curves, rectangles, text frames, etc. Graphical objectsare used a general purpose drawing and documentationtools for your schematic.

Library toolsIncludes a special selection of general, electrical andgraphical tools that support library-level componentediting, including pins, arrays, text, etc.

The Library Tools and IEEE palettes are available when using theSchematic Library Editor.

IEEE toolsIncluded special graphical objects used when creating orediting IEEE style library components.

All toolbar objects and processes can be accessed frommenus, if preferred. This allows the user to hide the toolbars(including the Schematic Editor and Library Editor maintoolbars), freeing additional workspace.

Page 115: USRGUIDE

User Guide

115

Refer to A Quick Tour of EDA Client for clues on howto create toolbars and define toolbar buttons.

Mouse and keyboard shortcutsAs you read through this guide, you will notice severalmouse and keyboard shortcuts that are used to speed-up orsimplify frequently performed operations. For example,pressing P, J allows you to place a junction without havingto open the Place menu, then choose the Junction menuitem. Using the LEFT MOUSE button for ENTER and the RIGHTMOUSE button for ESC will allow you to perform manyoperations without using the keyboard. Some keyboardshortcuts provide the only practical way of performing anoperation when you don’t wish to move the mouse in theworkspace, such as choosing a new zoom level whilemoving a selection.

Another commonly used mouse shortcut is to double-clickon any placed object, popping up the Change dialog box forthat item, allowing you to edit its attributes.

Keyboard Shortcut keysAdvanced Schematic comes with two keyboard shortcutkey lists, one for the Schematic Sheet Editor and one for theLibrary Editor. These an be edited and new shortcut keylists created.

As well as being able to map keyboard shortcut keysdirectly to processes, keys can be mapped to menus.If a key has mistakenly been mapped to both a menuand directly to a process, then menu mapping haspriority. Refer to A Quick Tour of EDA Client forclues on how to define shortcut keys.

Keyboard shortcuts can include key combinations,including CRTL, SHIFT and ALT in combination with eitherone or two keys.

Page 116: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

116

Keyboard shortcuts AutodisplayThe right pane of the status bar flashes relevant keyboardshortcuts during any graphical editing procedure, such aspart placement or object dragging.

To view keyboard shortcuts during any graphicalediting procedure, press the F1 key. A dialog box withcurrent shortcuts will appear.

Process ContainersEDA Client includes a method of storing a processidentifier with a particular configuration of the processesparameters. This is done in a Process Container.

Placing a process container allows the designer to hold thesetup for a particular process with the design. An exampleof when this could be used is the Electrical Rule Check,where a certain design requires a special setup. Anotherexample of using a process container is one which holds thesetup for generating a netlist. One process container couldbe set up to generate a spice format netlist for simulation.Another process container placed in the same design couldthen hold the netlist setup to generate a Protel formatnetlist, ready for loading in to Advanced PCB.

PlacingProcess containers are placed by selecting the Tools-Process Container-Place menu item. The process containerwill appear floating on the cursor and can then be placed onthe design sheet.

ConfiguringTo configure a process container, select the Tools-ProcessContainer-Configure menu item. Alternatively, double clickon the process container.

Page 117: USRGUIDE

User Guide

117

ExecutingTo execute a process container, select the Tools-ProcessContainer-Run menu item. Alternatively, double click onthe process container and press the Execute button.

ReportsIf the process specified in the process container generates areport, the name of the report file can be specified. If thereport file name is specified in the process container, whenthe report is generated it will appear as a child of thedocument that holds the process container.

Page 118: USRGUIDE
Page 119: USRGUIDE

User Guide

119

Objects

Your design is created by placing components, wires,junctions, power ports, etc on the sheet. All entities that canbe placed on the sheet are known as objects. Componentsare a special case, they are a collection of objects whichhave been stored as a single entity.

Each object has its own set of attributes which can bedefined for each instance of the object.

PlacingPlacing parts is covered in the Components and Librarieschapter.

All objects can be placed by using any of the three types ofresources, that is; menus, toolbars or shortcut keys. Theapproach used to place objects is consistent for all objects.An example of placing wires is given below.

Example; Placing a WireTo place a wire in the current sheet window:

1. Zoom in on the sheet (press PAGEUP two or threetimes) until you can see the visible grid. Choose theWire menu item from the Place menu (shortcut keys:P, W or click the Wire button on the Wiring Tools).

Note that the Windows, pointer-style cursor changes into across hair shape. This is the workspace cursor and is usedeach time you create or move an object.

2. Click LEFT MOUSE (or press ENTER) once to define astart point for the wire.

Page 120: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

120

As you move the cursor, note that its position is constrainedby a grid and that the cursor jumps to the nearest grid point.The cursor is snapping to the Snap Grid.

3. Drag the wire segment in any direction. Click LEFTMOUSE (or press ENTER) to end this first segment ofthe wire.

4. Move the cursor to continue with a new wire segment,which is extended from the existing segment. ClickLEFT MOUSE or press ENTER again to define thissegment.

If you make a mistake, you can press the DELETE key toremove the last wire segment. You can also press ESC orRIGHT MOUSE to “cancel” the segment currently beingplaced.

5. When this wire is finished, click RIGHT MOUSE to endthe segmented wire.

Note that cursor is still a crosshair, indicating that you arestill in place wire mode. This allows you to end one wireand then begin a new series of wire segments elsewhere inthe workspace, without having to choose the Place Wireprocess launcher again.

6. To exit wire placement, press ESC or RIGHT MOUSE asecond time. Note that the cursor changes back intothe Windows-style pointer.

Wire/bus placement modeAdvanced Schematic provides five wire, bus and lineplacement modes that can be selected by pressingSPACEBAR as you place these objects. Options include twoorthogonal modes and an any angle mode.

Any AngleAllows wire to be placed at any angle.

Page 121: USRGUIDE

User Guide

121

90/90 LineConstrains wire placement to horizontal or verticalorientation. Two modes, one keeps the segment attachedto the cursor the shorter of the two, the other keeps thesegment attached to the cursor the longer of the two.45/90 LineConstrains wire placement to 0, 45, 90, 135, 180, 225,270 or 315 degree orientation. Two modes, one keepsany straight segment being placed with the cursor, theother mode keeps the 45 degree line with the cursor.

Automatic junctionsA further addition to the wiring environment in AdvancedSchematic is the Auto-Junction feature. This optionautomatically places a junction when two wires areconnected in a T-type fashion. When one of the wires isremoved, the junction is automatically removed. Auto-Junction complements the Guided Wiring feature (refer toGrids in the Configuration chapter).

Creating graphical objectsOther objects are created and placed similarly to wires,buses and lines. These include objects like rectangles,polygons and arcs, ellipses and bezier curves. Some objectsare pre-defined, such as junctions or power ports.

For more information about creating and placing theseobjects, see the Advanced Schematic Reference Manual. Formore information about working with objects afterplacement, read on.

EditingThe attributes of an object can be edited both graphicallyand through its dialog box. To edit the look of an object onthe sheet, it is generally easier to do it graphically. Other

Page 122: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

122

attributes, such as color or font are edited through theobject’s dialog box. To pop up the dialog box for anyplaced object, use the Edit-Change menu item, or doubleclick on the body of the object.

While PlacingYou can edit the attributes of an object while it is beingplaced. While the object is floating on the cursor, press theTAB key. This pops up the object’s dialog box. Theadvantages of editing during placement are;

• changes to attributes become the defaults for that type ofobject. If you change the color of a wire duringplacement then wires will have that color from then on.These changes to defaults are held in the SCH.DFT file,so the next time you run the application, wires will stillbe this color. Note - this method of setting defaultsdepends on the setting of the “Permanent” check box inthe Preferences dialog box (Options-SchematicPreferences). If this is on, these changes will not becomethe defaults.

• objects that have a numeric attribute, say componentdesignators or net labels for a bus, will auto-increment.

• there is no need to edit the object after it has been placed,speeding the schematic capture process.

GraphicallyOne of the advantages of a graphically based editingenvironment is the ability to make changes directly toobjects displayed on-screen. In Advanced Schematic,individual objects can be edited one at a time or you candesignate groups of objects to be changed together.

The section describes the fundamentals of using AdvancedSchematic’s graphical editing environment to makechanges to schematics and to the individual objects placedinside the schematic sheets.

Page 123: USRGUIDE

User Guide

123

Focus and SelectionIn other Windows applications selection is a single concept,the process of choosing or designating objects as aprerequisite for manipulation. A typical example would beselecting one or more objects to be copied to the clipboardand then pasted to another location. Often selected objectscan be manipulated directly. For example, selected objectscan be moved or re-shaped in most graphical applications.

Unlike other Windows applications, Advanced Schematicuses two independent methods for accomplishing selectionoriented tasks. These methods, selection and focus are usedrepeatedly when creating or editing schematics. Breakingselection into two these independent processes allowsAdvanced Schematic to perform complex manipulations ofobjects which are either impossible or difficult using thesimple selection method described above.

Focus and selection provide two distinct andindependent methods for changing objects in theworkspace. These two methods distinguish AdvancedSchematic from other Windows applications wherefocus and selection are normally merged into a singleoperation.

FocusWhen you position the cursor over an Advanced Schematicdesign object and click LEFT MOUSE it becomes the currentfocus and the way this object is displayed changes. This issimilar to the way you can change the focus in Windows byclicking on an open window to make it active.

Only one object can be in focus at a time. Inside AdvancedSchematic sheets, you can tell which object is the currentfocus, because its graphical editing handles and / or theobject outline is displayed. For example, if you click LEFTMOUSE over a component part, the part is outlined with adashed line. To move the focus, click on another object orclick in a clear area of the sheet to release the focus.

Page 124: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

124

Graphical editing

When an object is in focus, you can move the object, deletethe object or edit its graphical characteristics. For example,you can change the size or shape of graphical arcs,rectangles, etc. by dragging the handles. Click LEFT MOUSEon the object in focus to move it. Also, the object in focuscan be deleted by pressing the DELETE key. Moving anddeleting individual objects is described in more detail underMoving and Dragging.Handles and polyline behavior

Some design objects have special graphical editingcharacteristics that derive from their polyline behavior. Forexample, when you place wires, buses or graphical lines,you define a vertex each time the wire, bus or line changesdirections. These vertices are displayed as handles when theobject is in focus. These objects can have complex shapes(hence “polyline”), but can be manipulated (moved, cut,copied, pasted, cleared or deleted) as a single object.

Page 125: USRGUIDE

User Guide

125

If you position the cursor directly over a handle and clickLEFT MOUSE again, you will be able to drag the vertex to anew position and the attached wire segments will stretch. Ifyou position the cursor in the middle of a segment and drag,the segment will move but other segments will remainanchored to their current position.

Every object that has its shape created during placement:wires, buses, non-electrical lines, polygons, bezier curves,rectangles, rounded rectangles, arcs and ellipses all sharethis common polyline behavior as they are placed andgraphically edited.

Similarly, polygons have movable vertices and beziercurves have control points which function similarly tovertices.

One key characteristic that all of these objects have incommon is the ability to add or delete vertices (or beziercontrol points) from a placed object.Add a Vertex or Control Point

To add a vertex or control point:

1. Click on a polyline object to place it in focus.

2. Position the cursor over the line segment. Click andhold LEFT MOUSE where you would like to insert thenew vertex and press INSERT. The segment will now“bend” at the cursor.

3. Move the new vertex to the desired location andrelease LEFT MOUSE to place.

If you find that the cursor jumps to the nearest handlerather than remaining where you clicked, disable theObject’s Electrical Hot Spot option in the Preferencesdialog box.

Page 126: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

126

Remove a vertex or control point

Sometimes you will want to remove a vertex (or controlpoint) when reshaping a polyline object. To remove avertex or control point:

1. Click on a polyline object to place it in focus.

2. Position the cursor over any handle. Click and holdLEFT MOUSE to grab the handle.

3. Press DELETE to remove the vertex (or control point).Summary

As illustrated in these examples, focus is prerequisite to anumber of graphical editing functions that are performed onindividual objects. Note that although you can remove thesingle object in focus, by pressing DELETE, you cannot usethe clipboard process launchers: Edit-Copy, Cut, Paste orClear. Clipboard process launchers work only on aselection.

SelectionSelection provides a second, distinct method ofmanipulating schematic objects. Unlike focus, selection isused with both individual objects and with groups ofobjects. Selection is cumulative, that is objects remainselected until de-selected.

Selection supports the clipboard process launchers: Edit-Copy, Cut, Paste and Clear.

Special Edit-Move process launchers allow selections to bemoved or rotated in a single operation. Selection also workswith Advanced Schematic’s global editing feature, whichcan limit global changes to selected or un-selected objects.

The simplest selection method is to move the cursor over anindividual and press SHIFT+LEFT MOUSE. This adds theobject to the current selection. Pressing SHIFT+LEFT MOUSEagain will remove the object from the selection.

Page 127: USRGUIDE

User Guide

127

Unlike focus, described above, selection does not displayan object’s graphical editing handles or a dashed outline.Instead, the object is outlined in the selection color(Options-Schematic Preferences).

These two methods of changing objects provides additionalcontrol when editing individual objects or complex groupsof objects. For example, you can focus on, and graphicallyedit a series of selected single objects, without changing thecurrent selection.

Objects are selected, added to a current group of selectedobjects or removed from the current selection using avariety of methods.

Objects can be added to (or removed from) the currentselection either singly or in groups, using both menu itemsand mouse/keystroke shortcuts. Once selected, objects canbe moved, grouped, un-grouped, exported to another file,cut, copied, pasted into another window or location in thecurrent sheet window or cleared.

A key feature Advanced Schematic’s complexselection model is the ability to click LEFT MOUSE inschematic sheets without de-selecting objects thatwere previously added to the current selection. Thisallows the user to perform a wide variety ofoperations without effecting the current selection.

Care must be taken when manipulating selections toensure that the current selection includes only thedesired objects. Use the Edit-De-Select All processlauncher (shortcut: X, A) to clear the current selection.

If something unexpected happens, remember that theEdit-Undo or Redo process launchers can be used torestore a previous condition.

Selection and highlighting

When you select an object, it is outlined in the selectioncolor (default yellow) assigned in the Options-Schematic

Page 128: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

128

Preferences dialog box. The object remains selected untilyou remove it from the selection using the De-Select menuitems.

Highlighting is related to selection but works within anoperation, such as re-routing a wire or when generating anetlist. You can see wires highlight during both of theseprocesses. As objects highlight, you will notice thathighlighted object is not displayed in the Selections colorbut is temporarily outlined in black.

Both selection and highlighting are based on the geometryof objects in the workspace. In other words, physicallyconnected objects are included in the selection. This allowsyou to use selection to trace the connectivity of your design-- like a “continuity” check as you manually routeconnections and to perform other selection-basedoperations, such as Cut, Copy or Paste.

This flexible model of selection is very powerful, butmay sometimes cause unexpected results, becauseobjects remain selected until de-selected. Use theEdit-De-Select-All process launcher (shortcut: X, A)to clear the current selection before you begin a newprocedure that uses selection. If you forget to de-select, use the Edit-Undo process launcher to stepback to the point of the unintentional result (seebelow).

Making selections

Objects are added or removed from the current selectionusing the following procedures:

• Use direct selection: SHIFT+LEFT MOUSE to add or deleteindividual objects to the current selection.

• Use the Select-Inside area tool button, then drag aselection rectangle over the desired area in the sheet. Allobjects that fall completely inside the rectangle will beadded to the current selection.

Page 129: USRGUIDE

User Guide

129

• Hold down LEFT MOUSE and drag a selection rectangleover the desired area in the sheet. All objects that fallcompletely inside the selection rectangle will be added tothe current selection.

• Use the Edit-Select, De-Select and Toggle Selectionmenu items to define the objects in a selection.

• Double click on an object to open the object’s dialogbox, then change the selection attribute of the object. Useglobal editing to change the selection attribute of otherplaced objects of the same type.

Because objects remain selected until they are de-selected,you can combine these methods. Remember, theseprocesses can be re-assigned to different mouse/keyshortcuts by customizing the shortcut keys (Client Menu-Customize).Select, De-Select and Toggle Selection Menus

The Edit-Select menu items allows you to select all objectsinside or outside of an area, all objects in one sheet, or allobjects. You can also select by net or physical connection.These options allow you to extend the selection (or de-selection) beyond a few objects.

Edit-De-Select provides the same options, less the Net andConnection process launchers. Using these two sets ofprocess launchers you can define complex grouping thatcan then be moved, copied or deleted, etc. The Edit-ToggleSelection process launcher allows you to turn the selectionstate of individual objects “off” or “on” which duplicates“direct” selection performed using SHIFT+LEFT MOUSE,described above. Shortcut: press X to pop up the De-Selectmenu.

Select and De-Select menus include:

Inside Area

Allows you to define a rectangular selection area. Onlythose objects that lie completely inside the area areincluded.

Page 130: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

130

To choose the objects inside a selection rectangle:

1. Choose Edit-Select-Inside Area (shortcut: S, I)

You will be prompted “Select First Corner.”

2. Position the cursor then press ENTER or LEFT MOUSE todefine the first corner of the selection rectangle.

The prompt changes to “Select Second Corner.”

3. Move the cursor to enclose the selection area in thehighlighted rectangle.

4. Press ENTER or LEFT MOUSE to complete the selection.

The newly selected objects will be highlighted using theselection color. Any previously selected objects will remainselected until de-selected.

Outside Area

This option selects everything in the workspace outside theselection rectangle. The rules for inclusion in the selectionare the same as for the Inside Area process launcher. Theprocedure for defining the selection rectangle is the same asfor Inside Area. Use this to select objects which haveinadvertently been placed off the sheet.

All

This option selects everything placed in the sheet.

Net

This option selects all wires and pins on the chosen net (onthe current sheet), including those connecting via a netidentifier. To use this feature:

1. Choose Edit-Select-Net.

2. Position the cursor over a wire within the desired netand press ENTER or LEFT MOUSE.

Page 131: USRGUIDE

User Guide

131

The entire net will be displayed in the selection color. Theselected pins do not change color. To examine which pinsare selected choose the Reports-Selected Pins menu item.

Connection

This option selects all wires and pins that are physicallyconnected. To use this feature:

1. Choose Edit-Select-Connection.

2. Position the cursor over a wire within the desired netand press ENTER or LEFT MOUSE.

Non-electrical objects will not be selected, even if theytouch the connected objects.

Toggle Selection

The Toggle Selection process launcher allows you toquickly add (or remove, if already selected) objects fromthe current selection. To use this feature:

1. Choose the Edit-Toggle Selection process launcher(shortcut E, N).

You will be prompted “Choose Object to Toggle Selectionstate”

2. Click on an object to add or remove the object fromthe current selection.

The prompt “Choose Object to Toggle Selection state” willbe continuously displayed.

3. Press ESC to leave the Toggle Selection process.Selection and the Clipboard

Objects that are selected can be cut and copied to theclipboard and from there pasted into other schematic sheets,or into any Windows application that supports the Windowsclipboard. Selections can also be deleted via the Edit-Clearmenu item or the CTRL+DEL shortcut keys.

Page 132: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

132

Using the clipboard - Cut/Copy/Paste

Cutting a selection

The Edit-Cut process launcher clears the current selectionfrom the workspace and copies it to the AdvancedSchematic clipboard. The Edit-Paste process launcher canbe used to place the selection back into any open AdvancedSchematic sheet window.

To cut the current selection from the active window:

1. Make sure that the current selection includes onlythose items you wish to cut.

Use the shortcut SHIFT+LEFT MOUSE to add or remove itemsfrom the current selection.

2. Choose Edit-Cut (shortcut: SHIFT+DELETE).

You will be prompted “Choose Clipboard ReferenceLocation.” A reference location is a coordinate younominate relative to the selected item(s). When you pastethe selection, you will be “holding” it by this referencelocation, allowing you to accurately position the selection.

The clipboard holds the last selection only, each timeyou use the Cut or Copy process launcher, youoverwrite the previous selection.

3 Position the cursor at the desired reference point andclick LEFT MOUSE or press ENTER.

The selection will be cleared from the display and copied tothe clipboard.

When using a mouse, the cursor is not “tied” to thecurrent snap grid. However, when you designate areference point during Cut or Copy, the grid pointnearest to the cursor will be used.

Page 133: USRGUIDE

User Guide

133

Clipboard Reference option

The Options-Schematic Preferences dialog box includes aClipboard Reference option which enables/disablesprompting for a reference point when using the Edit-Cutand Edit-Copy process launchers.

Copying a selection

The Edit-Copy process launcher copies the currentselection to the clipboard. The Edit-Paste process launchercan be used to place a copy of the selection back into anyopen schematic document window, or any other Windowsapplication that supports the clipboard.

The clipboard holds the last selection only, each timeyou use the Copy process launcher, you overwrite theprevious selection.

To copy the current selection from the active window:

1. Make sure that the current selection includes onlythose items you wish to copy.

Use the shortcut SHIFT+LEFT MOUSE to add items to thecurrent selection or to de-select any selected items.

2. Choose Edit-Copy (shortcut: CTRL+INSERT).

You will be prompted “Choose Clipboard ReferenceLocation”. A reference location is a coordinate younominate relative to the selected item(s). When you pastethe selection, you will be “holding” it by this referencelocation, allowing you to accurately position the selection.

3. Position the cursor at the desired reference point andclick LEFT MOUSE or press ENTER.

The selection will be copied to the clipboard.

Page 134: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

134

When using a mouse, the cursor is not “tied” to thecurrent snap grid. However, when you designate areference point during Cut or Copy, the grid pointnearest to the cursor will be used.

Pasting a selection

The Edit-Paste process launcher can be used to place thecurrent clipboard contents into any open schematic sheet.

To copy the current selection from the clipboard:

1. Choose Edit-Paste (shortcut: SHIFT+INSERT).

You will be prompted “Select Location to Place Selection”and a highlighted outline of the selection will be displayed.The cursor position relative the selection is determined bythe Reference Point designated when Cut or Copy was usedto add the selection to the clipboard.

2. Position the selection in the workspace and click LEFTMOUSE or press ENTER.

You can repeat the Paste process to duplicate the selection.

When a selection has been added to the current layout, anyparts that have been added will be not be re-designated.Resolving duplicate designators is done using the Tools-Annotate process launcher.

Clearing a selection

The Edit-Clear process launcher deletes the currentselection from the workspace without copying it to theclipboard.

To clear the current selection from the active window:

1. Make sure that the current selection includes onlythose items you wish to clear.

Use the shortcut SHIFT+LEFT MOUSE to add items to thecurrent selection or to de-select any selected items.

Page 135: USRGUIDE

User Guide

135

2. Choose Edit-Clear (shortcut: CTRL+DELETE).

The selection will be cleared from the display. Use the Edit-Undo process launcher (shortcut: ALT+BACKSPACE) torestore the cleared selection.

Delete

Using the Edit-Delete process launcher is similar in manyways to using selection and the Cut or Clear processlauncher described previously. However, with Delete, yousimply position the cursor over the item, click LEFT MOUSEand it is deleted from the sheet. If you “miss,” the systemwill simply “beep” allowing you to try again. This providesan efficient way to selectively clear objects from the design.

Unlike the Edit-Clear process launcher, Delete isindependent of selection. In other words, the currentselection is not discarded when you use the Delete processlauncher.

All deletions can be restored by using the Edit-Undoprocess launcher (shortcut: ALT+BACKSPACE). If you havedeleted a series of items, they will be restored one-at-a-timestarting with the last deleted item. The Edit-Redo processlauncher uses the same first-in/last-out logic. Redo reversesthe Undo operations, one-at-a-time.

Quick-Copy AttributesThe “quick copy attributes” feature allows you to copy theattributes of one object into a second object.

To use the feature, have the “destination” object floating onthe cursor. Position the cursor over the “source” object andpress the INSERT key.

All attributes of the placed object will be copied to thefloating object. If the floating object did not “inherit” theattributes of the placed object, the cursor crosshair may not

Page 136: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

136

have been inside the body of the placed object whenpressing INSERT. Place the object in the desired location.

The quick attribute copy function can be used to“clone” the attributes of all schematic object types,except sheet symbols. In other words, any object canbecome any other object using the quick-copyfeature. This process works whether placing a newobject or can be used when moving an already-placeditem. It does not work when dragging connectedelectrical objects.

Moving and DraggingTo Move an object is to change its position on the sheetwithout regard to its connectivity. To Drag an object is tochange its position on the sheet whilst maintainingconnectivity.

Moving and dragging can be performed on single objects oron selected groups of objects.

Moving ObjectsTo move a single object, position the cursor over the object,click and hold on the object, then move it to the desiredlocation. To move a group of objects they must be selectedfirst. Once they are selected, click and hold on any of theselected objects, then move the selection to the desiredlocation. Both of these operations can also be initiated viathe Edit-Move sub-menu.

When one object is “on top” of anotherGraphical objects can be placed in sheets so that theyoverlap. When you place a new item, it is placed at the“front” of other items, by default. When you move items,they retain their position in the display, relative to otheroverlapping items. Five special move process launchers are

Page 137: USRGUIDE

User Guide

137

provided for changing the “stacking” order of items in thedisplay:

Move to front This process launcher moves an object to the front of otheritems in the display and allows you to re-position it. Whenyou use this process launcher, you are prompted to choosethe item to be moved. When you click on the item, it floatson the cursor. It can now be re-positioned on the front ofthe other objects.

Bring to front This process launcher moves an object to the front of otheritems in the display. When you use this process launcher,you are prompted to choose the item to be moved. Whenyou click on the item, it moves to the front of the displaywithout changing its x or y coordinates.

Send to back This process launcher sends an object to the back of otheritems in the display. When you use this process launcher,you are prompted to choose the item to be moved. Whenyou click on the item, it moves to the back of the displaywithout changing its x or y coordinates.

Bring to front of This process launcher moves an object to the front ofanother item. When you use this process launcher, you areprompted to choose the item to be moved. When you clickon the item, you are then prompted to choose the “target”item. The item to be moved will be re-located in front of the“target” without changing its x or y coordinates.

Send to back of This process launcher moves an object behind anotheritem. When you use this process launcher, you areprompted to choose the item to be moved. When you clickon the item, you are then prompted to choose the “target”item. The item to be moved will be re-located behind the“target” without changing its x or y coordinates.

Dragging ObjectsTo drag a single object, position the cursor over the object,hold the CTRL key down and click and hold on the object.

Page 138: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

138

Release the CTRL key, then drag the object to the desiredlocation. To drag a group of objects they must be selectedfirst. Once they are selected, select the Edit-Move-DragSelection menu item, click to chose the drag selectionreference location, then drag the selection to the desiredlocation.

While dragging connected electrical objects, pressingSPACEBAR toggles the orthogonal wire mode, pressingCTRL + SPACEBAR rotates the objects.

Working With TextAdvanced Schematic allows users to find and replace textanywhere on a sheet or across a multi-sheet project. Forexample, you may wish to rename a net across a multi-sheetproject.

To search and replace text:

1. Choose the Edit-Replace Text menu item.

The Text Find And Replace dialog box opens.

Text Find and Text Find And Replace dialog boxes are similar. Thisprocess supports the use of wildcards (*) when searching for text andallows the use of conditional replacement {X=Y}.

Page 139: USRGUIDE

User Guide

139

2. Type the Text To Find string.

The Find Text and Replace Text process launchers supportthe use of the asterisk “*” as a wildcard character forvariable length text strings (see below).

3. In the New Text field, type the replacement text.

Replacement can be made conditional (see below).

4. Choose the Scope for the change.

Changes can be applied to the Current Document Only or toAll Open Documents. Objects with text to be changed canbe restricted to selected or un-selected items, if desired.

5. Choose any other Options.

Changes can be made on a Case Sensitive basis (upper andlower case must match exactly when searching).Replacement text always matches the case used whentyping text into the New Text field. If you wish, you canhave Advanced Schematic prompt you before thereplacement is made for each item.

Restricting changes to net identifiers

This option allows the user to restrict find and replace textediting to net identifier objects: net labels, power ports,ports and sheet entries.

6. Click OK to perform the text replacement.

Syntax for wildcard find and replace

The wildcard character “*” can be used to extend thedefinition of target strings. For example, S* will limit thefields to strings beginning with S, etc. Wildcards are casein-sensitive.

Braces “{” and “}” can also be used to define the rules fortext replacement.

Page 140: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

140

Defining the change follows this syntax:{oldtext=newtext}. This means you can change a portion ofthe string "oldtext" to "newtext". You can use multiple setsof brackets to define complex replacements. In this case theleftmost replacement is made, then the next on, etc. This isvery powerful, so you must take care because the firstchange can effect subsequent replacements, possiblygenerating an unexpected result.

Any mistakes can be corrected with the Undo processlauncher. You can further limit the replacement by typing{!Text=text} to make the changes case sensitive. In thiscase, "Text" becomes "text". Otherwise replacement is casein-sensitive by default.

ArraysWhen you select the Edit-Cut (or Copy) menu item, you areplacing a copy of the current selection in the clipboard. TheEdit-Paste Array process launcher provides a powerful wayto place multiple copies of any clipboard selection into theworkspace. For example, you can use this feature automatethe placement of multiple bus entries. Text incrementingcan be used when placing objects with numeric values thatincrement, as when placing component pins from theSchematic Library Editor.

To use this feature:

1. Select the object(s) that you wish to paste as an arrayof repeated objects.

Page 141: USRGUIDE

User Guide

141

2. Choose Edit-Cut if you wish to clear the selectionfrom the workspace prior to placing the array, orchoose Edit-Copy if you wish to retain the selectionin the workspace.

3. Position the cursor then press ENTER or LEFT MOUSE todesignate a reference point.

The reference point can be at any position relative theselection and will be used in positioning the array when itpasted back into the sheet.

4. Choose Edit-Place Array (shortcut: p, y)

The Array dialog box options define the array. Arrayparameters include:

Placement VariablesPlacement variables define rules for the array. Optionsinclude:

array:Item Count This option sets the number of times the selection is to beplaced.

array:Text increment This option is used for designators on pins or parts.Setting this to 1 (default) will assign array designators in-series, for example U1, U2, U3 and so on. This featurefollows the same rules as the automatic designatorincrementing when placing parts or pins.

The first element in the array has the same numericvalue as the image in the clipboard, so if using theincrement feature cut to the clipboard rather thancopy.

Repeated items are placed in a linear array, using thespacing values specified under Spacing.

array:Spacing These values specify the horizontal (and/or vertical)distance between each item as it is placed. Each unit isequal to .1 inch.

Page 142: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

142

To complete the array placement:

5. Enter the desired values and click Place. Click OK tostore the current parameters for later use or Cancel toreturn the parameters to their previous settings.

Once all array parameters have been define, you will beprompted: “Select Starting Point For Array.”

6. Position the cursor where you want the array to begin,then press ENTER or LEFT MOUSE.

Use the arrow keys (rather than the mouse) to accuratelyposition the starting point (and thereby the array) on thesnap grid.

You can disable the requirement to provide areference point when placing a selection into theclipboard (Cut or Copy menu item) by turning theClipboard Reference option “off” in the Options-Schematic Preferences dialog box.

Aligning ObjectsTwo methods of alignment are provided. You can align agroup of selected objects on both axis, by choosing Edit-Align-Align. Or, you can align objects on one axis, bychoosing the other Align menu items.

Page 143: USRGUIDE

User Guide

143

Align objects by selecting them and then choosing Edit-Align processlauncher, or by choosing Edit-Align--Align Left, Align-Right, etc.

To align objects using the Align Objects dialog box:

1. Add all items to be aligned to the current selection,making sure that only items to be aligned are selected.You can use the Edit-DeSelect-All menu item(shortcut: x, a) to clear the current selection.

2. Choose Edit-Align-Align and designate the desiredhorizontal and/or vertical alignment combination.

You can also choose the Align To Grid option to constrainalignment to the nearest grid point.

3. Click OK to close the dialog box and align theselection.

To align objects using the other Align process launchers:

Page 144: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

144

1. Add all items to be aligned to the current selection,making sure that only items to be aligned are selected.You can use the Edit-DeSelect-All process launcher(shortcut: x, a) to clear the current selection.

2. Choose Edit-Align and the desired alignment processlauncher (Align Left, Align Right, etc).

3. The selection will be aligned according to the processlauncher selected.

Remember, if you are not happy with the alignment, youcan use Edit-Undo to remove this change.

Page 145: USRGUIDE

User Guide

145

Multi-Sheet Designs and Project Management

OverviewIn Advanced Schematic, each sheet is stored as anindividual file that is opened in its own independentwindow. Any sheet can be opened and edited independentlyof all other sheets, using the File-Open process launcher.Multi-sheet projects are also opened using the File-Openprocess launcher, simply tick the Project check box in the

File dialog box.

A schematic design can consist of a single sheet drawing ormultiple linked sheets. Irrespective of the number of sheets,Advanced Schematic treats each design as a project.

Multiple sheet projects support large or complex designsthat cannot be served by a single sheet. Even when thedesign is not particularly complex, there can be advantagesin organizing the project across multiple sheets. Forexample, the design may include various modular elements.

Page 146: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

146

Maintaining these modules as individual files allowsseveral engineers to work on a project at the same time.Another reason to organize a project across multiple sheetsis that this method allows the designer to exploit theconvenience of small format printing (e.g. laser printers).

When two or more sheet files are associated or linked insome way, we refer to this as a multi-sheet project. Thereare a number of methods for organizing multiple sheetprojects. Choosing one approach or another is based uponthe type, size and structure of the project.

Advanced Schematic provides a number of special featuresthat simplify the management of even complex projects.

Managing multiple sheet projectsProject management is the process of defining andmaintaining the links between individual sheet files thatcomprise a project. These intersheet links establish netlist-level connectivity while providing other projectmanagement benefits. For example, these links supportnavigating, viewing and accessing each individual sheet ina project as well as multi-sheet netlist generation andElectrical Rules Checks (ERC).

Sheet-to-sheet links also allow the user to open and saveentire projects in a single operation. Also, global textsearches and editing can be performed across multiplesheets.

Many Advanced Schematic features such as netlistgeneration, re-annotation and printing apply to theopen sheet files associated with a project. Therefore,in many cases an entire project (which includes aMaster sheet and all associated sheets) will need to beopened at the same time, to perform these operations.

Page 147: USRGUIDE

User Guide

147

Structure of a multi sheet schematicA major benefit of Advanced Schematics multi-sheetenvironment is an intuitive system that makes managementand navigation of even complex hierarchies easy. All multi-sheet projects include a special sheet file called the mastersheet. The master sheet is the top, or first sheet in the designhierarchy. The term hierarchy refers to the relationshipbetween master sheets and sub-sheets that make up theproject. A special class of sub-sheet, complex sheets, areused to represent duplications of previously created sub-sheets. This hierarchical structure can have a number offorms, defined by the method used to connect the sheets.

Hierarchical organization supports a truly modularapproach by allowing the designer to work with functionalblocks. These blocks have a spatial relationship on thesheets which support both “top down” and “bottom up”design methodologies.

Master sheets and sub-sheetsIn multi-sheet designs, the master sheet always includes atleast one sheet symbol. The sheet symbol is a special objectthat provides a graphical representation of another sheet(called a sub-sheet) in the hierarchy.

Along with its graphical display attributes (color, size,location, etc.) the sheet symbol has two additional fields: asheet name and a file name. The sheet name field is a textlabel, and is provided for reference only. The file namerefers to the specific sheet file that the sheet symbolrepresents. This field provides the link between the mastersheet and its sub-sheet, and thereby defines a project. Thisassociation of sheets resides on two levels.

At the project level, the association is maintained by thepresence of sheet symbols in the master sheet. Projects arealso defined at the electrical (or connective) level by net

Page 148: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

148

identifiers. Net identifiers provide the links that connectcircuits across multiple sheets.

OrCAD SDT users will be familiar the concept ofmaster sheets, although this system handles projectmanagement somewhat differently. OrCAD usingspecial objects, called pipelines to link “flat” projectsheets. Under Advanced Schematic, sheet symbolsrepresent each sheet in all multi-sheet projects.

Understanding hierarchyManagement of hierarchical multi-sheet schematics mayseem complicated at first. However, once a few basicprinciples are understood, it is relatively easy to use thepower of hierarchy to organize complex projects.

In the simplest terms, hierarchy means that a sheet containsa sheet symbol, signifying another child sheet that shareselectrical links with its parent. The number of hierarchicallevels in a project is unrestricted, except by availablememory. Hierarchies are identified by the way sheets areorganized and the method used to indicate sheet-to-sheetconnections.

Advanced Schematic supports four models of intersheetconnections, defined by the scope of three intersheet netidentifier objects.

Net identifiersNet identifiers are objects which provide the connective“glue” between nets in schematic sheets.

Net identifiers are placed to “connect” objects belonging toa common net, either inside a single schematic sheet oracross two or more sheets in a hierarchical project. Theconnections can be physical (when the object is attacheddirectly to another electrical object, e.g. “wired) or logical

Page 149: USRGUIDE

User Guide

149

(when the net identifier indicates a link to another netwhich has the same name).

Four of the five possible net identifier objects are illustrated above.Hidden pins on schematic parts (described below) provide a fifth methodfor identifying nets inside schematic sheets.

Net identifiers include:

net labels These objects are attached to individual wires, part pinsand buses.

ports These objects can label net connections horizontallybetween sheets on the same hierarchical level. Ports arealso used to connect to a matching sheet entry in the sheetsymbol that represents the sub-sheet the port is on. This is avertical connection.

sheet entries These objects label net connections vertically throughsheet symbols to a matching port on the sheet below.

Two special classes of net identifiers are always global:

power ports Objects connected to wires or part pins which represent apower net (or any other user-specified global net).

hidden pins Special pin type definition (within schematic parts),assigned to global nets, which behave like power ports.

Page 150: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

150

Ports are known as module ports in OrCAD SDT andsheet entries are called sheet nets. The OrCAD modelof hierarchy refers to horizontal intersheetconnections, using module ports as a flat design.

The scope of net identifiersWhen discussing multi-sheet projects, we refer to the scopeof net identifiers. Some net identifier objects can be used toidentify nets within a single project sheet. For example ifnet labels are local then a net labeled Clock1 on one sheetwill not connect to an identically named net on anothersheet. We refer to the scope of net labels in this case aslocal.

Net labels can also be specified to be global net identifiers.Unlike the example above, all instances of the net labelClock1 on each schematic sheet, would be deemed to bepart of the same net. Two special net identifier objects arealways deemed to be global: power ports and hidden pins.

Names assigned to hidden pins are not alwaysconsistent from part-to-part, especially when librarieshave been compiled from different data books. Forexample, an equivalent power pin may be assigned toVCC in one part and VDD to another.

A common way of reconciling this potential conflictis to create a net for the sheet by connecting a VDDand VCC power object anywhere on a sheet. This isoften more convenient that editing the parts in thelibrary. Parts with hidden pins should always bechecked carefully for consistent power netassignment, otherwise netlisting problems can becreated.

The scope of net identifiers is defined when generating anetlist (Tools-Create Netlist) or when running an electricalrules check (Tools-Electrical Rules Check).

Page 151: USRGUIDE

User Guide

151

Of course, the scope of net identifiers for a project must bedetermined at the beginning of a project. These options areillustrated below, by five models that show the possibleconfigurations of a multi-sheet design.

Five models of hierarchyThe relationship between project sheets and net identifiersis best described by illustrating the five possible models ofproject organization in Advanced Schematic.

It is important to remember that all Advanced Schematicmulti-sheet projects are organized hierarchically, even ifthe hierarchy is limited to two levels, where a single mastersheet holds sheet symbols to all sub-sheets. Models 1 and 2below, show the so-called “flat” model supported byOrCAD (Model 1) and Protel DOS Schematic (Model 2),common to other non-hierarchical systems.

Every multi-sheet project must include at least onemaster sheet with sheet symbols for its sub-sheet(s).This allows identification of all sheets associated witha single project.

Page 152: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

152

Model 1 - Global ports define intersheet connections

This model of hierarchy represents “flat” designs. Ports are the onlymethod used to link two sheets. This model supports multiple sheetsthat are linked “horizontally.” The master sheet and sheet symbolsprovide a means of identifying all project sheets only. All circuitinformation if found in the sub-sheets.

The first model for intersheet connection illustrates the useof global ports. In this model, ports point to a net onanother sheet. The master sheet includes a sheet symbol forall sheets in the project, however no connections areindicated inside the master sheet. Note that the net names inthe two sheets are local, meaning that the net name appliesonly to the sheet, not other sheets in the project. In flatsheet designs, each sheet is always unique.

Ports route connections that pass from sheet to sheet. Thismodel of sheet organization treats your design as though itwere laid out on a single large sheet that has been cut intoindividual pages.

While this approach works fine for designs of limited size,management of large designs can be somewhat awkward, asthis method, relies on the designer to label each port.

Page 153: USRGUIDE

User Guide

153

Model 1 is a “flat” design. The correct Net Identifierscope for this model is Ports Only Global scope whencreating a netlist or performing an ERC.

Model 2 - Global net labels and ports

This model of hierarchy represents “flat” designs. Ports and net labelsare used interchangeably. The master sheet and sheet symbols providea means of identifying all project sheets only. All circuit information iffound in the sub-sheets.

In the second model, intersheet connections are providedby global net labels. Global ports can also be used with thismodel, providing the user takes care to avoid conflictbetween port and net label names. Again, a sheet symbol foreach sheet is placed in the master sheet to link the project.

Page 154: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

154

Model 2 is also a “flat” design. The correct NetIdentifier scope for this model is Net Labels and PortsGlobal when creating a netlist or performing an ERC.

Using net labels and ports to implement inter-sheet connectivity

The sheet symbols in flat projects are not connected to nets.Flat design intersheet connections are accounted for oneach sheet separately, using either net label, ports or bothnet labels and ports together.

Placing a sheet symbol does not create a new sheet, itonly establishes a link to a sheet with the samefilename.

Model 3 - Sheet entries define simple hierarchy

This model of hierarchy represents “simple hierarchy” where each sheetappears once in a design. Hierarchy is implemented by sheet entries (ineach sheet symbol) which will connect to a port of the same name onthe sub-sheet below. Nets labels are local.

Page 155: USRGUIDE

User Guide

155

The third hierarchy model is sometimes referred to assimple hierarchy. This model supports multi-level or blockdesign, where the hierarchy can be represented by a tree-like structure and all intersheet connections are vertical,defined by sheet entry symbols in each sheet symbol andsimilarly named ports on the respective sub-sheets.

In this model, the sheet symbol represents a child sheet,which descends from the parent. Global net identifiers arenot used in this model.

Model 3 is sometime called true hierarchy becausethe intersheet connections follow the hierarchy of thesheets themselves and the design can be as “deep” asyou like. The correct Net Identifier scope for thismodel is Sheet Symbols / Port Connections scopewhen creating a netlist or performing an ERC.

Page 156: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

156

Model 4 - complex hierarchy defined by sheet entries

This model of hierarchy represents “complex hierarchy” where a sub-sheet appears more than once in a project. Hierarchy is implemented bysheet entries (in each sheet symbol) which connect to a port on anothersheet. Nets labels are local.

The fourth model is referred to as complex hierarchy. In thismodel, the same sheet symbol can be placed more than oncein a project, either by being placed more than once on asingle sheet, or by being placed on multiple sheets.

This model fits projects which a highly modular. Anexample would be a stereo amplifier, where left and rightchannels are identical circuits.

The Tools-Complex to Simple process launcher is used to“flatten” a complex hierarchy into a simple hierarchy, priorto generating a non-hierarchical netlist (e.g. for PCBlayout).

Page 157: USRGUIDE

User Guide

157

Model 4 also uses the Sheet Symbols / PortConnections Net Identifier scope when creating anetlist or performing an ERC (once the designconverted from complex to simple).

Hierarchy in Advanced Schematic is not exclusivelylinked to the electrical links that make up a multi-sheet circuit. You can also create projects whichgroup unlinked sheet files for convenience.

Using sheet symbols to implement hierarchyThe sheet entry links the port on the sub-sheet to a net onthe parent sheet. Every sub-sheet has a “parent” sheet,either the master sheet, or another sub-sheet from which itdescends.

Similarly, so-called “flat” design master sheets (the firsttwo models, above) include sheet symbols, labeled with thefilenames of each sub-sheet. These sheet symbols are not“wired” together, using sheet entries.

Page 158: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

158

Model 5 - Sheet parts to represent hierarchy

This is a special model of hierarchy which uses the SheetPath field in the Part dialog box to set a path to (“point to”)another project sheet. This allows the user to specify that aninstance of a part is to behave like a sheet symbol. In thiscase, its pins behave as sheet entries and connect tomatching ports on the sheet specified in the Sheet Pathfield.

Model 5 also uses the Sheet Symbols / PortConnections Net Identifier scope when creating anetlist or performing an ERC. You must also checkthe Descend Into Sheet Parts option when creating anetlist or performing an ERC.

More about hierarchical designModels 3, 4 and 5 illustrate powerful ways to organizecomplex projects. In hierarchical designs, sheet symbolscan represent functional blocks, with the sheet entriesserving as connectors that tie circuitry on the sheet to thesub-sheet.

Page 159: USRGUIDE

User Guide

159

This hierarchical structure can be represented by thinkingof the first sheet as the “parent” and the sheet representedby sheet symbols as the “child.” In the terminology ofhierarchical design, we can say that the child is descendedfrom the parent. Extending this model, the child can have itsown “children,” -- additional sheets that descend, in thistop-down structure, to lower and lower levels.

As shown above, hierarchy can be either simple, where eachsheet is unique, as in Model 3 or complex, where the samechildren (and its children) appear more than once in thedesign -- a modular approach illustrated by Model 4.

Tools for working with HierarchyAdvanced Schematic includes a number of tools to make iteasy to work with multi-sheet designs. These include toolsfor navigating, tools for creating sub-sheets and sheetsymbols and a tool to convert complex hierarchy to simplehierarchy.

To make hierarchical design practical, it is necessary tohave some means of tracking and navigating the sometimescomplicated relationships between the many sheets that canbe incorporated into a single project. Advanced Schematicprovides a unique tool for this purpose, the ProjectManager.

Project Manager display optionsThe Project Manager displays three types of sheet icons:

Master sheets These icons represent the top level of hierarchical projectsor “flat” multi-sheet projects, which have two levels only(see the examples, above under Five models of hierarchy).

Page 160: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

160

Sub-sheets These icons represent sheets that are “descend” frommaster sheets.

Complex sheets These icons represent duplicates of other sub-sheets, usedin complex hierarchies. When you click on a Complexsheet icon, the focus moves to the sub-sheet it represents.

Colors can be assigned to these three icon types (Options-Schematic Preferences).

The width of the Project Manager can be changed bydragging it’s right hand side toward the center of thescreen. The cursor will change into a left-right arrow whenthe cursor is over the right edge of the window. To see moreof the hierarchy tree, hold LEFT MOUSE and drag to adjustthe width.

Navigating through a project

Using the Project ManagerSimply click on any sheet icon in the Project Manager tomake that sheet the active sheet.

Using the Toolbar ButtonsThere are also two buttons on the main toolbar fornavigating up and down through the hierarchy.

Select the DOWN arrow and you will be prompted to selecta sheet symbol (if you just want to jump to the lower sheet)

Page 161: USRGUIDE

User Guide

161

or a sheet entry (where you will jump to the lower sheet andbe presented with the matching port).

Select the UP arrow and click on a port to be taken up to thesheet above and be presented with the sheet symbol for thissub-sheet, centered on the matching sheet entry.

Creating sheet symbols and sub-sheets the easy wayAdvanced Schematic includes two processes to “automate”the project building process.

Top-DownIf you are designing in a top-down fashion, where you startwith the top sheet and lay the design out as function blocksusing sheet symbols, then use the Tools-Create Sheet FromSymbol process launcher. You will be prompted to select asheet symbol. After selecting a sheet symbol, AdvancedSchematic will open a new schematic sheet with the correctfile name, with ports on it to match each of the sheet entrieson the sheet symbol you selected.

Bottom-UpIf you are designing in a bottom-up fashion, where the sub-sheet already exists and you need to create a sheet symbolto represent it, use the Tools-Create Symbol From Sheetprocess launcher (the parent sheet must be the active sheet).The Choose Document to Place dialog box will pop up.Select the sheet you would like to base you sheet symbolon. You will then be asked if you want to ReverseInput/Output Directions. After you answer this, you will bepresented with a sheet symbol floating on the cursor. Thissheet symbol will have the correct file name to link it to thesub-sheet and will have sheet entries to match each of theports on the sub-sheet. To respond to the ReverseInput/Output Directions question - each of the ports on thesub-sheet has an I/O type. Let say one of the ports has anI/O type of output. If you respond “yes” to the ReverseInput/Output Directions question then the sheet entry that

Page 162: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

162

matches this port will have an I/O type of input and will beposition on the left of the sheet symbol. If you respond “no”to the Reverse Input/Output Directions question then thesheet entry that matches this port will have an I/O type ofoutput and will be position on the right of the sheet symbol.

Adding and removing individual sheets from aproject

The contents and structure of a project are defined by thesheet symbols placed in the topmost (or master) sheet orany of the child sheets. To add an existing sheet to aproject, place a sheet symbol in the master sheet with amatching sheet filename field. To remove a sheet from theproject, simply delete the sheet symbol with that sheet’sfilename.

Rebuild ButtonThe Rebuild button, in the top of the Project Manager, isused to update the hierarchy tree when any changes aremade to the project’s organization, like adding or removingsheets or re-ordering the project.

Page 163: USRGUIDE

User Guide

163

Design Verification

Design verification is the process of ensuring that theschematic capture process has produced an accurate “snapshot” of your design, from which a valid netlist can becreated. Advanced Schematic includes a tool specificallyfor this purpose, the Electrical Rule Check. This processexamines the schematic for both electrical inconsistencies,such as an output pin connected to an output pin, anddrafting inconsistencies, such as unconnected net labels orduplicate designators.

Selecting the Tools-ERC menu item pops up the SetupElectrical Rule Check dialog box. This is used to set-up andexecute the Electrical Rule Check. Running the ERCproduces two results. First, a text report is generated, listingthe electrical and logical violations either for the activesheet, or the entire project. Secondly, error markers areplaced on the sheets at the site of specific ERC violations asan aid in tracking and correcting reported problems.

The Electrical Rule Check process is carried out bythe Netlist Server, install the Netlist server beforeselecting the Tools-ERC menu item.

Page 164: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

164

Setup Electrical Rule Check (ERC) dialog box.

Suppress ERC symbolsThere may be points in the design which you know will beflagged as ERC errors or warnings, which you do not wantto be flagged. To suppress these, place a No ERC symbol ateach point. Points with No ERC symbols will not beincluded in the ERC report and will not have ERC errormarkers placed at them.

Verification OptionsA wide variety of basic electrical errors are reported. Forexample, floating input pins on parts and shorts betweentwo differently named power nets.

Page 165: USRGUIDE

User Guide

165

Setup Electrical Rules CheckWhen the Tools-ERC menu item is selected, the SetupElectrical Rule Check dialog box pops up. This dialog boxis used to define the options, scope and parameters of theelectrical rules check. Options include:

Multiple Net Names On NetReports physical nets with multiple net identifiers withdifferent names.Unconnected Net LabelsReports net labels that are not physically connected to atleast one other electrical object in the sheet.Unconnected Power ObjectsReports power objects that are not physically connectedto at least one other electrical object.Duplicate Sheet NumbersReports sheets that have been assigned the same sheetnumber (Options-Document Options dialog,Organization Tab).Duplicate Component DesignatorsReports parts that have identical designator labels. Thiscondition can occur when the Annotate process launcherhas not been used or when the Tools-Complex to Simpleprocess launcher has not been used to “flatten” acomplex hierarchical project (project with duplicatesheets).Bus Label Format ErrorsReports net labels attached to buses which are notlegally formatted to reflect a range of signals. Logicalconnectivity for buses can be assigned by placing a netlabel on the bus. Generally, this net label will include allbus signals, e.g. HA[0..19] represents nets named HA0,HA1, HA2, etc. to HA19.Floating Input PinsReports unconnected pins whose Electrical Type is setto Input.

Page 166: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

166

Suppress WarningsThis option generates a report and error markers forerror conditions only. Warning conditions (see Pin /Sheet Entry / Port Rule Matrix, below) are ignored. Thisallows the designer for perform quick ERCs for all error-level problems.

Other OptionsCreate Report FileThis option generates a text report listing all ERC reportinformation.Add Error MarkersThis option places special error markers on the sheets, atthe site of each reported warning or error. Specialfacilities in the sheet editor allow the user to jump fromerror marker to error marker.Descend Into Sheet PartsThis options treats sheet parts as hierarchical sheetsymbols. A sheet part is a part which is specified tobehave like a sheet symbol, where its pins are associatedwith ports on a sheet which descends hierarchicallyfrom the sheet part. The “descending” sheet is defined inthe part’s Sheet Part path field.

Net Identifier ScopeThe net identifier scope determines the method ofconnectivity being used in a multi-sheet design. The netidentifier scope chosen here should be the same as thatchosen when creating the netlist.

For a complete explanation of the net identifier scope referto the sections Netlists and Multi-sheet Designs and ProjectManagement.

Page 167: USRGUIDE

User Guide

167

Electrical Rules MatrixAn error or warning can be specified using a matrix of pin,port or sheet entry connection or non-connectionconditions. This matrix is read in an across and downfashion. For example, to see what the report condition foran input pin connected to an output pin would be, locate theinput pin row down the left of the matrix, then locate theoutput pin column across the top of the matrix, then goacross and down from each to where they meet. Thecolored square where they meet is green, signifying thatthere will be no warning if an input pin is connected to anoutput pin. Similarly if you examine the report conditionfor an output pin connected to an output pin, you will seethat the square is red, signifying that if this condition isdetected it will be flagged as an error.

The user can specify either errors or warnings forconnections of pin types, ports or sheet entries. Items whichare set as warnings give the user the option to suppresswarnings when performing preliminary checks, which willkeep these initial ERC reports short and manageable.Warnings can then be comprehensively checked by thedesigner, later in the design validation process.

To change the default settings in the matrix, the user needonly click LEFT MOUSE in any matrix square. With each clickthe square will toggle from No Report (green), Warning(yellow) and Error (red), then back to No Report, etc.

The process of running an ERC is integral toproducing a valid netlist for a project. The presenceof electrical or logical violations will not preventAdvanced Schematic from generating a netlist,however incomplete or invalid. Carefully check andresolve all reported errors prior to netlist generation.

Page 168: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

168

Error Report Format

The error report includes information to identify whichsheet the error or warning occurred on and the location onthe sheet. Where appropriate there will also be net identifierand component designator information.

Resolving ErrorsAdvanced Schematic includes features to assist in theprocess of resolving the errors and warnings detected bythe Electrical Rule Check.

Error Report For : C:\CLIENT\SCH3\EXAMPLES\DEMO1.ERC 30-May-1995 15:18:05

1 Error Duplicate Designators POWER.SCH C3 At (320,471) AndCPU.SCH C3 At (374,109)

2 Error Multiple Net Identifiers : CPU.SCH RESET At (270,220) AndCPU.SCH RST At (330,220)

3 Warning Unconnected Input Pin On Net N00121

C:\CLIENT\SCH3\EXAMPLES\CPU.SCH(U5-6 @310,620)

5 Error Floating Input Pins On Net N00121

Pin C:\CLIENT\SCH3\EXAMPLES\CPU.SCH(U5-6 @310,620)

6 Warning Unconnected Net Label On Net CLOCK

CPU.SCH CLOCK

End Report

Page 169: USRGUIDE

User Guide

169

In the Component Browser, set the Browse type to ErrorMarkers. Select an error in the list and press the Jumpbutton to have the error marker presented in the center ofthe active window. Note that a description of the errorcondition will appear on the Status Line, alleviating theneed to switch back and forth to the error report. Pressingthe Text button in the Component Browser will pop up adialog box which can also be used to examine thedescription of the error condition.

Errors will typically be due to the one or more of thefollowing;

• drafting errors - wires overlapping pins, lines being usedinstead of wires, the design being wired with the snapgrid off so the wire ends don’t touch the pin ends, wires /busses finishing under a port instead of touching the endof the port ...

• syntax errors - net identifiers with spelling mistakes,busses incorrectly labeled ...

• component errors - component pins placed the wrongway around on the component, pins with aninappropriate Electrical Type ...

• design errors - a design condition that the ERC detects asan error, such as two output pins connected, etc ...

To resolve an error, start at the error marker, read the errorcondition on the Status line and consider the possiblecauses as described above. If there are no problems at theerror marker, trace the net through the design. There are twobuttons on the main toolbar to assist tracing a net through amulti-sheet design, the large up and down arrows. Use theseto trace a net / bus up and down through a multi-sheetschematic. Use the Status line for information on what to doafter selecting one of these tools.

Page 170: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

170

A floating input pin in essentially an “open circuit”condition. While this condition is reported at theinput pin, the break could be anywhere between thedriving output pin and the floating input pin. If thereis nothing wrong at the input pin, trace the net back tothe output pin, checking along the way for the“break”.

If all the nets of a bus are reporting an error, look forthe problem at the bus level, perhaps a typing mistakein a bus port or a missing net label, perhaps a bus linefinishing under a port (which may not be visible).Click on a bus to focus it to see if it ends under a port.

Page 171: USRGUIDE

User Guide

171

Netlists

OverviewIn the EDA Client environment, creation of netlists isperformed by a separate Netlist server. The Netlist servermust be installed before a netlist can be created. For tips oninstalling a server refer to the chapter, A Quick Tour of EDAClient.

This section describes how physical and logicalconnectivity are used to generate a valid netlist for simplesingle sheet designs or complex multi-sheet hierarchicalprojects. Generating a valid netlist for a design is theessence of schematic capture. This process can becomplicated by the many ways that nets can be defined inAdvanced Schematic. If you are not familiar with AdvancedSchematic’s connectivity rules, you may wish to review thechapter, Fundamentals of Schematic Capture, beforeproceeding with netlist generation.

Page 172: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

172

The Tools-Create Netlist process launcher is used to generate netlists inover 30 formats (described below).

ConnectivityA key element of electronics design automation is theability of schematic capture and PCB layout systems torecognize the graphical connections in schematic sheetsand the logical connections that are defined by netidentifiers.

This concept -- connectivity -- is used at several levelsduring the design process. Two types of connectivity areemployed under Advanced Schematic:

Logical connectivityLogical connections are created when net labels, portsor hidden pins identify nets elsewhere within a singlesheet, or across project sheets.Physical connectivityExamples of physical connections would be wirestouching component pins. Advanced Schematic uses thephysical geometry of your layout to performconnectivity-based operations. One example is theability to select a connection or net. Physicalconnectivity is used, along with logical connectivity,

Page 173: USRGUIDE

User Guide

173

when generating a netlist from a design. It also allowswire-to-pin connections to be maintained as componentsare moved, etc.

About netlistsNetlists are common to most electronics designenvironments. Simply stated, a netlist is a summary of allthe connections (or networks) that comprise a circuit.

Generally, netlists are simple ASCII text files. The typicalnetlist format includes descriptions of components, such asthe designator and package type combined with the pin-to-pin connections that define each net. Loading a netlist intoa printed circuit board layout package automates many ofthe tedious and error prone operations inherent in thedesign process. In Advanced Schematic, you can quicklygenerate and examine a netlist of your current designwithout leaving the editor.

Netlist formatsNetlists come in many different formats, but are usuallygenerated as ASCII text files and contain the followingtypes of information:

1) Descriptions of the components in the circuit.

2) A list of all pin-to-pin connections in the circuit.

Some netlist formats combine both sets of data in a singledescription. Others, including Protel, separate the two setsof data into separate netlist sections.

As straight-forward text files, netlists are readily translatedinto other formats using a simple, user-written program.Netlists can also be created (or modified) manually using asimple text editor or word processor.

Page 174: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

174

If you intend to manually edit a netlist, make sure thatyou save the results in an “un-formatted” or “textonly” form, as hidden “control characters” can renderthe netlist un-readable by Advanced PCB.

3) Some netlist formats can include additionalinformation in component text or net text fields. Thisinformation can be used to link netlists withsimulators and board layout in ways that aren’tcovered by netlist hierarchy and connectivity.Examples include data for simulation and PCB layout.

Generating netlistsYou can generate a netlist for a project at any time whileusing the Schematic Sheet Editor. Select the Tools-CreateNetlist (shortcut: T, N) process launcher. When you choosethis menu item, the Netlist Creation dialog box opens.Options include:

Output Format optionsThe following table lists the status of Advanced Schematicnetlist output format options, at the time this manual waspublished. Check the README.TXT file and/or On-lineHelp system for current netlist format status.

Netlist format

Algorex

AppliconBRAVO

AppliconLEAP

Cadnetix

Calay

Calay90

Case

CBDS

ComputerVision

EDIF 2.0

Orcad - PLDnet

Orcad - PCB II

PADS Ascii

PCAD

PCAD NLT

Protel - Advanced PLD

Protel

Protel 2

Protel - Hierarchical

Protel Wirelist

Page 175: USRGUIDE

User Guide

175

EDIF 2.0 Hierarchical

EEDesigner

EEsof Libra

EEsof Touchstone

FutrureNet

Hilo *

Integraph

Mentor BoardStation 6

Multiwire

Racal Redac

Scicards

Spice

Spice Hierarchical

Star Semiconductor

Tango

Telesis

Vectron

XilinxXNF

* OrCAD asks user to manually insert interface definition. Protel handlesthis automatically (i.e.: A,B,CLOCK,OUT).

Scope of Net IdentifiersAs illustrated earlier in this guide, net identifiers (net labels,ports, sheet entries, power ports and hidden pins are allused to logically connect parts of the schematic sheet tonets.

Three options are provided that define the method used toassociate the three primary net identifiers (ports, net labelsand sheet entries) with certain nets, either on a single sheetor within a multi-sheet project.

By choosing one of these three methods, the designerdesignates these net identifiers as either global (a commonnet, which applies to all project sheets) or local (a net whichis associated only with a single sheet). Resolving the scopeof these net identifiers defines the netlist contents. Thethree options are:

Net Labels and Ports GlobalWith this option, net labels are assumed to apply to allsheets in a project. In other words, nets are global andeach instance of a net name or port is deemed to beconnected to all other identically named identifiers. Thismodel works like Protel Schematic 3 (DOS), where netlabels are always global to all project sheets.

Page 176: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

176

Only Ports GlobalThis option treats net labels as local only. All identicallynamed nets on a sheet are deemed to be connected.Inter-sheet connections occur only through identicallylabeled ports. This model works like the OrCAD SDT“flat” project model.Sheet Symbol / Port ConnectionsThis option makes inter-sheet net connections onlythrough sheet symbol entries and sub-sheet ports. Portsare deemed to be connected only to identically namedsheet entries in their sheet symbols on parent sheets.This model works like the OrCAD SDT “hierarchical”project model.

OptionsTwo other options define netlist contents:

Append Sheet Number to Local Net NamesThis option adds the sheet number (Options-DocumentOptions dialog box, Organization Tab) to each net. Ifyou have selected one of the net identifier scopes wherenet labels are local, this option ensures that each net inthe netlist will be unique, by appending the sheetnumber to it. This option can also be used as an aid indebugging netlist problems where nets should beconnecting across sheets but are not. By appending thesheet number you can identify which sheet a net isisolated on.Descend Into Sheet PartsThis option is enabled when using Sheet Parts. SheetParts are parts which are specified to behave like a sheetsymbol, where the pins connect to identically namedports on a child sheet. The Sheet Path field in the EditPart dialog box is used to identify the child sheet. Whenthis option is enabled, the netlist will include the sheetshierarchically below the sheet parts.

Page 177: USRGUIDE

User Guide

177

Protel netlist formatThe standard Protel netlist format is a simple ASCII textfile, split into two sections. The first part of a Protel netlistdescribes each component:

[ Marks the start of each componentdescription;

U8 Component Designator (label);

DIP6 Package description (Footprint). Anidentical description (Pattern) will berequired in the PCB library;

74LS38 Part Type, (or value);

(blank) three lines are un-used;

(blank)

(blank)

] marks the end of the componentdescription.

The component description section is followed by a listingfor each net within the netlist:

( marks the start of each net;

CLK is the name of the net. If no net name isassigned, the software will assign one (eg -N00001);

U8-3 shows the first component (by designator)and pin number. Pin numbers in AdvancedPCB library components must be an exactmatch;

J2-1 indicates the second node in the net;

U5-5 indicates another node;

) marks the end of the net.

Page 178: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

178

Note that net descriptions are distinguished fromcomponent descriptions by the use of rounded, ratherthan square brackets.

Protel 2 netlist formatThis option is an extended version of the Protel netlistdescribed above. It is distinguished by the additional fieldsupport and detail that supports Advanced PCB 2.0 andsimulation packages. Note that this format has threesections and that each field is first named, with the fielddata on the following line.

PROTEL NETLIST 2.0 File header identifies Protel 2format;

[ Bracket marks the start ofeach component description;

DESIGNATOR Each field is first identified;C8 Component designator

(label);FOOTPRINT

RAD0.2 Package description(footprint).

PARTTYPE

0.1uf Comment, (or value);DESCRIPTION

* Sheet part description field;Part Field 1

* Sheet text fields (1-16) of upto 255 characters;

Part Field 2

*

(etc.)... (continues to Part Field 16)

Page 179: USRGUIDE

User Guide

179

Part Field 16

*

LIBRARYFIELD1 Library component text fields(1-8) of up to 255 characters;

LIBRARYFIELD2

(etc.)... (continues to Library Field 8)LIBRARYFIELD8

] End component delimiter;( Begin net delimiter;H/-E Name of first net;DECA1-1C DEC36-1C PASSIVE First node in net. Includes:

component-pin designator(single blank space) part type-pin name (single blank space)Pin electrical type;

U16-1 74HC00-_A INPUT Next node in net; U16-2 74HC00-_A INPUT Last node in net; ) End net delimiter;{ Begin PCB Layout directive

delimiter;TRACK Each field is named, as above;10 Track width in mils (unit =

.001 inch);VIA

50 Routing via for net diameter(mils);

NET TOPOLOGY

SHORTEST Topology forplacement/routing;

ROUTING PRIORITY

Page 180: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

180

MEDIUM Routing priority for net;LAYER

UNDEFINED Routing layer;} End PCB Layout directive

delimiter.

Protel netlist parametersDesignators and Package Descriptions (footprint) arelimited to 12 alphanumeric characters. Comments can be upto 32 characters long. Net names can be 20 characters. Pinnumbers in netlists are limited to four alphanumericcharacters. No blank spaces may be used within thesestrings.

Any number of components or nodes can be included in aProtel or Protel2 netlist, limited only by available memory.

Other netlist formatsNetlists for other EDA environments often have manysimilarities to the Protel format. However, the order inwhich component or net information is displayed may vary,and package names (e.g., DIP6), component designatorsand Pin identifiers may require editing to match Protelnetlist field restrictions. Often, translation of the netlist isan option in the schematic package. Netlists created usingeither a Protel or “Tango” output option will usually befully compatible with The Protel Design System.

Package description (footprint) names and pinnumbers must have exact matches in the AdvancedPCB library for all components and connections inthe netlist. Advanced PCB accepts either a dash ( - )or comma ( , ) delimiter between the designator andpin number (U-6 or U,6).

Page 181: USRGUIDE

User Guide

181

Advanced PLD netlist outputProtel’s Advanced PLD application uses this netlist tocompile logic for FPGA/PLD programming. This formatalso supports the CUPL FPGA/PLD environment fromLogical Devices, Inc.

Page 182: USRGUIDE
Page 183: USRGUIDE

User Guide

183

Fonts

Advanced Schematic supports the TrueType fonts that aredelivered with Windows, including bold and italic formatsand display font scaling. TrueType fonts are supplied withWindows and are also available from third-party suppliersin a wide variety of typefaces. PostScript scaleable fonts,and Windows non-scaleable raster fonts can be used, whenthey are part of vector image files imported into AdvancedSchematic sheets.

Font managementFont management in Advanced Schematic gives usersextensive information about available font resources andcapabilities. Users can exercise broad control over fontusage, including the ability to apply a “System font” usedfor rendering part pin names, port names, power objects andsheet (border) references.

Font TechnologyFont technology and behavior can vary widely within theWindow environment. Two main types of fonts are used inthe Windows environment: Screen fonts, which are used bya display driver to show letters on a monitor, and printerfonts, which are geometric descriptions of letters used by aprinter to draw text on a page. Since screen fonts andprinter fonts are designed for a specific purpose, they canproduce undesirable results when used with a device forwhich they were not intended. For instance, if a fontintended for screen use only is used on an high-resolutionprinter, the text will have jagged, blocky letters.

Page 184: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

184

Fonts are installed from the Windows Control Panel,Fonts utility. To enable installed TrueType fonts,click the TrueType button and then the EnableTrueType fonts check box in the TrueType dialogbox. See your Microsoft Windows Users Guide fordetails about font management under Windows.

Font Style dialog boxAdvanced Schematic includes a powerful Font Style utilitywhich allows the user to monitor the available (installed)windows fonts and make intelligent font selections for bothdisplay and printing of schematic sheets.

The Font Style dialog box is available whenever you accessthe font assignment options for sheets or for design objectsthat include user-definable text fonts. Objects with userdefinable fonts include text annotations, text blocks,component designators, component part types, etc. Clickingthe Font Change button (in the object’s dialog box) opensthe Font Style dialog box. This dialog box displaysinstalled system fonts (by font type) including the fontsavailable for the current output device (if the driver for thedevice includes font information). The user can examine theinstalled fonts, change the font size and style or change thecurrent output device from this dialog box.

If the text on your print out do not appear the same asthe text on the screen, there may be a font substitutiontaking place. If the font used on the schematic sheet isnot supported by the target printer, Windows willperform a substitution. To check if a font is beingsubstituted, pop up the font style dialog box for thattext. Press the Select button to select the outputdevice, then press the Info button. The info field willdetail any substitution taking place.

Page 185: USRGUIDE

User Guide

185

Organization of Fonts in Advanced SchematicIn Advanced Schematic fonts can be partitioned into twogroups, those that are individually editable and those thatare a System Font.

Individually editable fonts include; component designator,part type, net label, text annotation, text frame, sheetsymbol name and sheet symbol file name.

System fonts include; border text, system title blocks, pinnames, pin numbers, ports, power ports and sheet entries.

Changing FontsThe easiest way to tell if a font is an individuallyeditable font, is to double click on the text. The dialogbox for that object will pop up. If it has a Font Changebutton, then this is an individually editable font. Ifdouble clicking produces no response or if there is noFont Change button, it is a system font.

Objects whose font is editable will have a Font Changebutton. Press this button to pop up the Font Style dialogbox. Use of this dialog box is described below.

System Font ControlTo change the system font, select the Options-DocumentOptions System menu item. This will pop up the DocumentOptions dialog box. On the Sheet Options Tab there is aChange System Font button. Pressing this will pop up theFont Style dialog box.

Font StyleThe Font Style dialog box gives you control over fontresources and provides extensive information about fonttechnologies for more predictable display and outputresults.

Page 186: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

186

Always make sure you are currently targeting theoutput device you intend to use before altering thefont. Press the Select button to check or change thecurrent output device.

Advanced Schematic’s font management system allows users to accessprinter-resident fonts, even if no screen font is available. If you choose aprinter-resident font that lacks a screen representation, the font will bedisplayed on screen with the closest matching screen font.

Advanced Schematic’s font management system recognizesand identifies TrueType, Vector fonts (includingPostScript® and printer/plotter-resident fonts) and Rasterfont technology. These font technologies are describedbelow.

TrueType fonts describe letters using vector outline descriptions ofletter shapes and are managed directly by Windows. Thesefonts scale smoothly, can be rotated include a display

Page 187: USRGUIDE

User Guide

187

version for accurate on-screen rendering (what you see iswhat you get).

Vector or plotter fonts used vector rather than bitmap descriptions.Vector fonts are used primarily by plotting devices andsome dot-matrix printers. These fonts are scaleable androtatable, but usually do not include an accompanyingscreen font.

Raster or bitmap fonts describe letters with small dots on printeror pixels on a monitor. Raster fonts are primarily intendedfor screen display and cannot be rotated.

PostScript fonts are similar to TrueType fonts. These outline fonts arenot directly supported by Windows and must be managedusing a system extension such as Adobe Type Manager™for Windows. PostScript outline fonts are down loadable toPostScript compatible printers allowing you to printsmooth representations of letters even if the font is notresident in your printer. These fonts scale smoothly, arerotatable and are usually accompanied by a screen font foraccurate screen rendering.

Page 188: USRGUIDE
Page 189: USRGUIDE

User Guide

189

Presentation Quality Schematics

Advance Schematic provides extensive graphic capabilitiesnot only for designing schematics, but also for presentingyour designs to others. This section details the use ofAdvanced Schematic’s presentation graphic features tomake your design sheets speak with clarity.

Page 190: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

190

Why presentation quality?The complexities of circuit design demand a great deal oftime and effort, but all that time and effort that you put intothe job is may not always readily apparent to the personreading the final result. By using graphical features such ascolors, fills, vector graphics images and TrueType fonts youcan highlight, emphasize and illustrate. Use of thiscapability is limited only by your imagination. Uses canrange from presenting highly readable and attractiveschematic sheets to clients to producing fully illustratedfield service manuals

Capabilities of printersBefore adding rainbow colors and elaborate typefaces toyour schematics, consider how you will be presenting yourproject. You will probably have to depend on your printerto show off your work. The ability of you computer monitorto show fonts and colors will usually exceed your printer’sability to reproduce them. Advanced Schematic can use anyprinting or plotting device that is compatible with MicrosoftWindows. Please refer to the Hardcopy section of this guidefor more information on producing output.

Page 191: USRGUIDE

User Guide

191

Some guidelines regarding the relative capabilities andlimitations of various types of printers follow. Please keepin mind that printing technologies are constantly beingimproved, especially in the areas of image accuracy andcolor printing. Color printing technology and the cost ofcolor printing are changing rapidly. You may decide thatthe color output capabilities of Advanced Schematic are soimpressive, that you will want to consider adding thiscapability to your design environment. Consult computertrade magazines for the latest information regardingcomputer printing technology.

Dot matrix impact printersDot matrix printers create letters and images with arrays ofdots. The most common of this type of printer creates dotsby driving pins against an ink ribbon and into paper.

Page 192: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

192

These types printers can produce output quickly but do notprovide very good resolution. Resolution refers to theability of a printer to reproduce an image accurately,usually measured in dots per inch (dpi). A few dot matrixprinters produce resolutions up to about 150dpi. Some dotmatrix printers have the ability to print colors, please referto your printer’s documentation for more information. Ifyou need to produce presentation quality output, dot matrixprinters are not recommended.

PlottersPlotters use one or more pens (or ink jet heads) to draw on asheet. Many plotters provide access to large format sheets,ideal for presenting complex design in a single view. Somedevices plot in color, assigning a different pen number tocolors. Windows is supplied with driver support for colorplotting. The resolution of a plotter is limited by point sizeof its pen(s). For example, the smallest dot a plotter canmake is the size of its pen’s nib. About .3 mm is the smallest

Page 193: USRGUIDE

User Guide

193

practical size for fluid ink. Color plots are usuallygenerated using disposable cartridge pins with fiber tips,which are much coarser than high quality pen points. Color“ink jet” style devices offer higher resolution and are moreflexible. These devices are also well supported by efficientWindows device drivers.

Details about controlling the output quality of pen plotters(including information on plotter communication) isprovided in the chapter Hardcopy.

Pen plotter limitationsUsing pen plotters presents several problems andlimitations. Most pen plotters are vector devices and manymodels currently in-use predate Windows. The Windowsenvironment is biased toward rasterized, rather than vector,output. As a result, Windows device driver support forvector plotting is often primitive, compared to support formore modern, raster devices.

Reproduction of fonts on plotters, for example is limited bythe page description language that a plotter uses to produceoutput. Reproduction of colors will also be limited to thecolors of your plotters pens and the combination of thosecolors. Unfortunately, most Windows plotter drivers do avery poor job of handling color plotting. AdvancedSchematic has been written to work around the tendency ofthese drivers attempts to “rasterize” the plotter output. Forexample, in many applications, Windows drivers attempt torecreate the dithering of non-solid colors found on screen.Under the best conditions, plotters tend to produce uneventones when printing larger areas of color, this is because aplotter usually overlaps pen strokes to fill an area.

Both manufacturers and third party developers have begunto respond to these problems. Please contact your plottermanufacturer or Microsoft for information regardingupdated drivers for your device.

Page 194: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

194

Ink jet printersInk jet or bubble jet printers create images by spraying inkon a page. Ink jet printers produce fairly good resolution(ranging from 300 to over 700 dpi), but tend to be fairlyslow. Edges of images and letters appear somewhat blurredwhen reproduced on an ink jet printer because the ink tendsto spread out and soak into the page. It is advisable to avoidlarge solid fills when printing to these devices.

Ink jet printers can produce fonts and images of goodquality, because most are well supported by rasterizedWindows output. The TrueType fonts used in AdvancedSchematic will be shown accurately. However, cautionshould taken when scaling ink jet output, as very fine lineswill tend to thicken and smaller type sizes may becomeillegible. Some models offer “plotter” size sheet capacity.Excellent results can be obtained with color ink jet printers.

Laser printersLaser printers provide presentation quality output byproducing high quality rendering of line (solid black) andgrayscale artwork. Laser printer resolution ranges from 300to 600 dpi. Sheet sizes are generally limited to US “A” orinternational A4 to “B” or A3.

Many laser printers support the PostScript page descriptionlanguage, which allows highly accurate reproduction ofTrueType fonts that are supported by Advanced Schematic.Since laser printers use toner instead of ink, edges of fontsand images tend to be very sharp. Laser printers are anexcellent choice for presentation quality output. While stillrelatively expensive, color laser printers are beginning tobe widely available, especially from service bureaus in thedesktop publishing field.

PostScript imagesettersWindows is supplied with drivers for PostScript-compatibleimagesetting equipment. This technology, which produces

Page 195: USRGUIDE

User Guide

195

output at 1000 to 2400 dpi, was developed to generatetypeset quality images for the graphic arts and printingindustries and is widely available in service bureaus. Forinformation about PostScript imaging, contact a servicebureau. These services are generally listed under GraphicArts or Typesetting.

Using colorTo assign a new color to workspace elements or objects:

1. Double click on the object to pop up the edit dialogbox for that object.

2. Click inside the color box for color attribute youwould like to change.

3. Choose from 224 different pre-defined colors bydouble clicking on your choice in the Color Selectordialog box; Click OK to complete the colorassignment.

Customizing display colorsTo customize one of the standard colors displayed in theColor Selector dialog box: You can set the Red/Green/Blue(RGB) values for any color, from 0 and 255 units.

As you make changes to the color assignments, it isimportant to make sure that your assignments don’t conflictin some way that will obscure vital details when you edityour layout. It is recommended that you start with the sheetcolor and selection color assignments if you wish to changea number of the defaults.

More about color assignmentIf your system supports up to 256 colors, your system colorpalette on will be set to display as many available colors aspossible as solid, rather than dithered (mixed) tones.

Page 196: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

196

Advanced Schematic dynamically reprograms the palette ascolors are assigned.

Unless the graphics Card/driver you are using is suppliedwith a Windows 24 bit driver, Windows will use a systempalette that allows multiple applications to share colorassignments. Windows will take the first 20 colors in thispalette for itself and simulate unavailable colors usingdithering (mixing two or more solid colors). All 20 defaultsare defined by Windows and all graphics drivers areexpected to provide color matches as close as possible tothese pre-defined values.

When using applications that take advantage of 256 colorpalettes, use of more than the standard 20 Windows defaultcolors may cause “stealing” of colors from the system orfrom other applications. For example, if you have a bit-mapas your background for Windows that used 256 colors thenthe quality of the display of the bit-map will deteriorate asyou select more colors for Advanced Schematic.

In standard VGA display mode, there are only 16 availablecolors. Windows “takes” all 16 and color requests fromapplications are either dithered or matched to the nearestsolid color. The application can request either dithered orsolid colors.

Image filesThe Place Graphic process launcher (shortcut: P, G) is usedto import a graphic image into schematic sheets or thelibrary workspace. Bitmap and vector images can beimported and scaled directly in sheets from a variety ofgraphics formats: PCX, BMP, GIF, TIFF, EPS (encapsulatedPostScript) and WMF (Windows Metafile).

When a graphic is placed, the graphic is not actuallyincluded in the document, rather there is a pointer to thesource graphic file. When printing, this file will need to be

Page 197: USRGUIDE

User Guide

197

accessible. It is necessary for these files be supplied withsheet files if you are sending files off-site for printing.

Page 198: USRGUIDE
Page 199: USRGUIDE

User Guide

199

Hardcopy

OverviewCompleting the schematic layout is only part of the designprocess. In most cases you will need to generate permanentdrawings that can be filed and viewed “off-line.” AdvancedSchematic includes support for a wide variety of “hardcopy” options for this stage of the design process. Virtuallyany device that is supported by Windows can be used toprint or plot your drawings.

Advanced Schematic provides a wide range of outputoptions when you are ready to turn your layout intoartwork.

PostScript optionsHigh-resolution PostScript “imagesetter” output is nowwidely available from graphic design and typesettingbureaus. This equipment is capable of producing positivepaper prints and films at resolutions from 1200 to 2540dots-per-inch.

Generating a print or plotAdvanced schematic printing and pen-plotting are handledsimilarly to other Windows applications. Windows managesthe printing (or plotting) process and provides a range ofraster and PostScript printer drivers and vector plotterdrivers. These range from 9 pin dot matrix printers andmulti-pen plotters, to high-resolution raster imagesetters.

Page 200: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

200

To print or plot from the active Schematic Editor or libraryeditor windows, choose the File-Setup Printer menu item(shortcut: F, R)

The Printer Setup dialog box, which provides access to all AdvancedSchematic printing/plotting options including a preview function andaccess to network settings.

Options include:

Select PrinterThe available output device options will include those thathave been installed using the Windows Control Panel (seeyour Microsoft Windows User’s Guide for details). Mostdevices are supported by drivers delivered with yourWindows software. You should note that new and updateddrivers are released for both new and existing devices on aregular basis. For the latest information about print drivers,contact Microsoft Windows support or the devicemanufacturer.

Page 201: USRGUIDE

User Guide

201

Rotation of fonts is not supported for all printers andthe substituted fonts will only be used if the text onyour schematic is in a standard horizontal (orlandscape) orientation, and within the size capabilityof the printer. PostScript printers support rotation offonts at any angle.

Batch TypeWhen using this option from the Schematic Editor, thisoption prints either a single sheet or a batch of all opensheets (including all opened projects). Using this optionfrom the Library Editor to choose between printing a singlecomponent (from the window that is the current focus) orall components in the current library. The latter optionallows you to print out an entire component library in asingle operation. When you choose this option, allrepresentations of a component are printed, including eachpart (or device) DeMorgan and IEEE equivalents, whenapplicable. Component description fields are also added tothe sheet. This option works with all other print/plotoptions, including scaling, etc.

Color modeTwo choices are available: color mode takes AdvancedSchematic screen color assignments and uses these toassign colors to the print or plot, based upon the optionsavailable in the print or plot driver. Monochrome PostScriptor HP-PCL devices will print grayscale representations ofcolor. The number of gray levels, and the assignment ofcolor to grayscale depends upon the driver and device. TheMonochrome option, prints images in solid black/whiteonly. No dithering or grayscale support is provided. Thisoption is appropriate for low resolution dot matrix andsingle pen plotting.

Page 202: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

202

MarginsThe user has total control over margins, limited only by themargin limits built into printers or plotters that do not allowprinting to the sheet edge (e.g., PostScript printers). Whenused with the Scale and Scale to Fit Page options(described below), this option will size the print area to fitas closely within the margins as allowed by the aspect ratioof the print area. The Preview option allows you to previewthe result of all settings and make adjustments beforeprinting.

Scaling prints and plotPrints and plots can be scaled to a known factor orautomatically scaled to fit within pre-defined page margins.

Scale

Type a scale factor from .001 % to 400%.

Fit on Page

The check print or plot will be expanded or contracted to fitwithin your pre-defined margins, on the page size selectedup for the target printer. The plot will be shrunk orexpanded to use the available space, keeping the correctaspect ratio.

When using scale to fit, set the margins to zero as thedriver will handle the no-print zones.

Set the portrait/landscape mode on the printer tomatch the sheet orientation.

TilingWhen the size of the sheet or library document to be printedexceeds the print area available on the target device,Advanced Schematic will automatically cut the print intotwo or more sheets or tiles. A pre-defined overlap ismaintained, so that no area of the print will be lost at the tile

Page 203: USRGUIDE

User Guide

203

edge. You can preview the result of tiling by pressing thePreview button.

It is often possible to reduce the number of sheetsrequired to tile a print, by changing the printer pageorientation and adjusting margins. Experiment whilein Preview mode to obtain the best match, beforechoosing the Print menu item.

SetupThis button opens the standard Printer Setup dialog box,where options for the target device are available.Depending upon the device, options include: sheetsize/orientation, the number of copies of each document,etc.

Printer Options

This Options button from this dialog box provides directaccess to the Printer’s own setup dialog box, also availablefrom the Windows Control Panel. These options add,remove or configure or set-up communications for thespecific output device. The available options vary with thefeatures of the selected device. Windows supportsbackground printing from the Print Manager. The queuingof prints and other options can also be controlled from thePrint Manager. See your Microsoft Windows User’s Guideor printer or plotter documentation for additionalinformation.

If you need to print or plot from another computer,print or plot to a file first, then transfer the file to theother computer. To do this, open the Control Panel’sPrinter dialog box and click Configure. Select Filefrom the ports menu. You will be prompted to namethe file when generating the plot.

This dialog box is supplied by the printer driver and is notgenerated by Advanced Schematic.

Page 204: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

204

Once all options have been entered, Click Print to proceedwith the print or plot, OK to save all the set-ups or Cancel toleave the Printer Setup dialog box without saving the newparameters. As the print or plot is generated (either directlyto the output device, or to a filename) the current page andlayer being printed is displayed in a dialog box.

If printing or plotting to a file, you will be prompted tosupply an Output File Name.

NetworkThis button provides access to network printer resources, ifavailable.

PreviewAfter changing any of the setup parameters you must pressthe Preview button to refresh the preview display.

More about PostScript printsSome PostScript printers will “time out” and discard thecurrent data when they don’t receive the end of pagemarker within a specified time. This can cause problemswhere you seem to be missing pages from your plots. If youexperience this problem using a PostScript printer or anyother printing device then you should go to the ControlPanel, select the printer icon, select the printer and click theConfigure button. Change the Transmission Retry to 500seconds, or some other large number. This will allow theprinter sufficient time to catch up before the Print Managergives up.

If you find your printout is incomplete, say all thecomponents are there but not all the wires, there may beinsufficient memory in the printer. Laser printers mustcapture the entire image in memory before printing it, so ifdoes not all fit in memory, then the image in memory isprinted as is.

Page 205: USRGUIDE

User Guide

205

Large format and pen plotsWindows is currently shipped with drivers for a number oflarge format plotters, particularly the new ink jet andelectrostatic plotters.

Support is also provided for a number of traditional penplotters, including Hewlett Packard HP-GL format models.Many other plotters can be configured to support the HP-GL language. See your plotter documentation for moreinformation about available emulation modes.

Current Windows pen plotting drivers, particularly for oldermodel plotters, have a number of reported limitations. Thisis because some drivers, including the generic HP-GLdriver, treat vector pen plotting similarly to raster plotting.This results in a number of problems, for example, poorrendering of filled arcs, inefficient (slow) plotting and otherproblems, especially when handling complex geometry.New or improved plotter drivers are now available for sometypes of plotters. For up-to-date information about plotterdriver support under Windows, contact Microsoft, yourplotter manufacturer or your Protel agent.

If you plan to do your plotting from anothercomputer, you will need to generate your plot as afile. To do this, open the Control Panel’s Printerdialog box and click Configure. Select File from theports menu. You will be prompted to name the filewhen you generate the plot.

Setting-up pen plotters

The options available will depend upon the type and modelplotter selected. Guidelines should be documented in yourplotter manual. Most plotters will require the followingsetup decisions:

Pen speed

Determining the correct pen Speed is largely a matter oftrial-and-error. Some users may find they have to choose aslower speed to get properly “filled” solid areas. The

Page 206: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

206

condition of the pen points, freshness of ink, etc., can havea significant impact on plot quality. Some plotters haveforce and acceleration options in addition to pen speed.Consult you plotter manual for recommended setting for thepaper or film and pen combination you intend to use.

Assigning pens

If generating pen plots for a multi-pen plotter, you canassign different pens to different colors. Pen size and pennumber assignments are made from the Printer Optionsdialog box.

Producing good quality pen plots

Pen plotters can be used to produce very sophisticateddesign artwork, when the many variables affecting plotquality are understood and applied to the process. But, thereare inherent problems with pen plotting that needconsideration. The variables that directly effect plot qualityinclude:

• Accuracy of the plotter -- particularly its “repeatability”or ability to return accurately to specific coordinates,over the entire plot area

• Type and condition of plotting pens• Plotting film or paper• Type and age of the ink selected• Environmental factors - i.e. temperature and humidity• Pen speed and pen size settingsOther factors include the experience of the operator and themaintenance and storage of equipment and materials.Following a few simple rules ensures that the best qualitypossible is obtained.

Perhaps the most important factor is the quality of the paper(or drafting film) and the pens that you use. Useinexpensive paper and fiber tip pens for check plots - savethe best pens and film for the final plot.

Page 207: USRGUIDE

User Guide

207

Plotter pens and plotting inks

There are a wide range of plotting pens on the market. Felt,and plastic tipped pens are convenient to use, but onlysuitable for draft plots. Pens used for master artwork mustbe capable of providing a consistent ink flow, must not dryout when the pen is lifted off the film for short periods andmust be of the correct diameter for the selected plot scale.

The pens that have been found to be the most suitable arethose with tungsten carbide, cross-grooved points. A latex-based ink will provide a dense plot without the ink runningor drying out in the pen. Your local plotter supplier willmake specific recommendations.

Drafting film

Your choice of drafting film is not as critical as the choiceof pen or ink, but good quality film is recommended. Forbest results, use single-matte or double-matte polyester filmof around 3 mil thickness. Your local plotter supplier willmake specific recommendations.

Setting the pen speed

Pen speed is a critical, and often overlooked factor in plotquality. It will be worthwhile to make a series ofexperimental plots to determine the optimum settings foryour combination of plotter and materials. You may alsoimprove the plot result by making small adjustments to thepen size selection. Slight changes will adjust the amount of“overlap” obtained when filling in solid areas -- with furtheradjustments needed as the pen wears during normal use.

Communications with Serial plotters

Most plotters are controlled via an RS232-C (serial)interface. A cable connects the plotter and computer toprovide two-way communication. Correctly configuringthis combination of computer software, serial port, cableand plotter can be a challenge, even for experiencedengineers.

Page 208: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

208

If you are installing a serial plotter for this first time, thissection explains the relevant RS232-C conventions.

The RS232-C standard defines the signals for bi-directionalcommunication where there is no inherit distinctionbetween the computer and the output device. In the jargonof serial communications both devices are referred to asDTE, or Data Terminal Equipment. Signals, such asTransmitted Data are assigned to the same pins in bothdevices, unlike the parallel standard where each pin has asingle function.

Each serial “terminal” needs an intermediary device ordevices to connect the “transmitted” data pin of one DTE tothe “received” data pin of the other, and vice versa, and tocorrectly configure the handshaking signals.

These intermediate devices are called DataCommunications Equipment (DCE), which connects to DTE,transmits and receives the data over a channel but is neitherthe source nor the final destination of the data. A modem isa DCE - it both modulates data for transmission over asingle voice channel and demodulates it back to digitaldata.

Baud rate, data bits, etc.

Once a correct serial connection between the computer andplotter is achieved, the correct communications parametersmust be selected.

Windows allows you to change these settings using theControl Panel Printer dialog box.

Your plotter manual should indicate the default settings ofthe plotter and will contain information on changing thecommunications setup. Some plotters do not have defaultsettings, as such, but use DIP switch settings which must beconfigured before the plotter is operated.

You will need to match these parameters using the Printerdialog box. Once set, these settings are stored with your

Page 209: USRGUIDE

User Guide

209

Windows preferences (Exit Windows, enabling the SaveSettings option).

A baud rate of 2400 bps is standard for many plotters, and agood place to start, if you don’t know the specificrecommendations for your plotter. This is an intermediatebaud rate and should yield error-free data transmission withcables up to 50 feet (15 meters).

Your plotter manual should also document its interfacingand handshaking settings.

Still having problems?

If you are confident that you have the right cabling andparameter settings and you still can’t plot successfully,check the following items:

• Inspect the cable connections and make sure that nowires have broken. Also check that your Windowssettings match the plotter baud rate, parity, etc.

• Confirm that you are using the selected serial port.• If your plot progresses normally at first, then starts

putting stray lines or arcs all over the layout, thisgenerally indicates improper handshaking. You may alsohave a problem with one or more pin assignments andyour cabling may need modification.

• Another possible solution is to keep the plotter cable asshort as possible and keep it away from power cords andother “noise” sources.

If you are using a long cable, you may have to reduce thebaud rate to obtain error-free transmission. Due to thedistributed resistance and capacitance of cables, there is atrade-off between cable length and baud rate for reliabledata transmission.

Remember, if you change the communications settings atthe plotter, you will have to match the new settings inWindows under the printer’s Set-up dialog box.

Page 210: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

210

Make sure that you have specified the correct plotter driver.For example, is your plotter a “true” Hewlett-Packard (HP-GL) or a “compatible”? Many plotters emulate HP-GL inaddition to their own plotting language. If you are using adual-language plotter you may have to configure the plotterfor the correct language. This is done using Control Panelor dip switch settings, depending upon the plotter type andmodel. See you plotter manual for details.

Finally, erratic plotter behavior can be the result of plot filecorruption -- usually the result of a disk failure or systemerror during file creation. If you have been unable to solveyour plotting problem, try plotting one of the (supplied)demonstration files, as a cross-check.

Page 211: USRGUIDE

User Guide

211

Reports

The following reports can be generated in the schematiceditor:

Bill of MaterialsThe Reports-Bill of Materials process launcher (shortcut: R,B) generates a Bill of Materials (BOM) report for the activedesign. Two versions of the BOM report are produced:

A condensed ASCII text format that lists part type fields,quantities of each type, and the designator fieldsassociated with each type. This version is produced in atabulated ASCII format and is named<FILENAME>.BOM.An expanded report that includes complete sheet-leveland library level descriptions for each component, bydesignator. This versions is produced in CSV (CommaSeparated Value) format and is named<FILENAME>.CSV.

The format for these two reports are illustrated in thefollowing examples:

Text BOM formatAn extract of the BOM format is illustrated below:

Page 212: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

212

-----------------------------------------------------

Part Used PartType Designators

-----------------------------------------------------

1 7 0.1uF C6 C5 C4 C3 C1

2 1 4.00 MHz XTAL1

3 1 4.915 MHz XTAL2

4 1 4PIN J1

5 2 4k7 R6 R7

The condensed ASCII format BOM gives a convenient component count,by type, cross referencing all part designators.

The condensed BOM will be opened automatically when theReports-Bill of Material process launcher is chosen, usingthe text editor specified in the Setup Run Options dialogbox (Client Menu-Run-Setup Run Options menu item, theEDA Client Text Expert editor is the default text editor usedif none specified).

CSV text BOM formatThe CSV BOM format is an expanded format that includes:

Designator for each partPart Type fieldPart (text) fields 1-16Description fieldFootprint (PCB pattern) field 1 (the default footprint)Component (library-level text) fields 1-8Sheet Part (Path) field

This report is generated in CSV (comma separated value)format, which loads directly into spreadsheets anddatabases. Users can nominate a “CSV Editor” in the SetupRun Options dialog box. Spreadsheet applications (i.e.Excel® and Lotus 1-2-3®, etc.) and database applications(DBase®, Approach®, etc.) generally support CSV formatdata.

Page 213: USRGUIDE

User Guide

213

If no CSV editor is installed on your system, any text editorcan be used to view the report.

CSV format Bills of Materiel can be written directly into spreadsheets ordatabases, which allows users to work directly with schematic data.

Cross referenceThe Reports-Cross Reference process launcher (shortcut: R,C) generates a listing of part designators, type and the sheetlocation (filename) for each part. The report is generatedfor active design. This report is output in ASCII text withthe name <FILENAME>.XRF, in the following format:

Part Cross Reference Report For : C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTD.XRF22-Dec-1993 12:41:22

Designator Component Library Reference Sheet

-------------------------------------------------------

C1 0.1 C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDADC.SCH

C2 0.1 C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDADC.SCH

C3 0.1 C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDADC.SCH

C4 .1uF C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDINT.SCH

C5 .1uF C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDADC.SCH

C6 10uF C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDADC.SCH

Page 214: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

214

C7 10uF C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDADC.SCH

DECA DEC36 C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTD.PRJ

DECB DEC36 C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTD.PRJ

R1 10K C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDADC.SCH

R2 10K C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDADC.SCH

The report will be opened automatically when the Reports-Cross Reference process launcher is chosen, using the texteditor specified in the Setup Run Options dialog box (TextExpert is the default text editor).

Project hierarchyThe Reports-Project Hierarchy process launcher (shortcut:R, P) generates a listing of project files for the active design.This report is output in ASCII text in the following format:

Project Hierarchy Report For RTD.PRJ

C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTD.PRJ

C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDADC.SCH

C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDINT.SCH

C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDINT.SCH

C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDINT.SCH

C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDINT.SCH

C:\PFWSCH\PRJ\RTDINT.SCH

The report will be opened automatically when the Reports-Project Hierarchy process launcher is chosen, using the texteditor specified in the Setup Run Options dialog box (TextExpert is the default text editor).

Page 215: USRGUIDE

User Guide

215

Links With Advanced PCB

NetlistsThe Netlist that you create from your schematic and loadinto Advanced PCB is the primary link from AdvancedSchematic to Advanced PCB. This file passes thecomponent information and the net information from yourschematic into the PCB design environment, allowing youto layout and route the board with the confidence that whatyou are working with is an accurate representation of whatyou specified in the schematic.

The Protel Design System supports full forward annotationof design changes made in Advanced Schematic intoAdvanced PCB. Updated netlists can be used to makeengineering changes to fully or partially routed PCBs. Seeyour Advanced PCB documentation for more information.

Routing DirectivesThe Protel 2 netlist format is supported by Advanced PCBversion 2.0 or later and includes PCB layout directivesdefined in the schematic. A PCB layout directive allows youto attach PCB net attributes to the net in the schematic.When you Auto-manual Route or Auto Route this net inAdvanced PCB it will have the track width, via width,routing topology, etc, that were defined in AdvancedSchematic. To place a routing directive select the Place-PCB Layout menu item. When placing the directive thebottom point of the directive must touch the wire toassociate correctly.

Page 216: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

216

Bi-directional cross probingAdvanced Schematic supports cross probing of Nets, Pinsand Parts to and from Advanced PCB. You can useSchematic/PCB cross probing while running AdvancedSchematic and Advanced PCB simultaneously, with a PCBdocument open and its source schematic open. Cross probefrom either editor by choosing one of the Tools-CrossProbe menu items and clicking on an object.

AnnotationThe process of re-assigning designators in your design iscalled annotation. This can be done at any stage in thedesign process and would typically be done when thedesign is complete. This ensures that no designators areskipped, and none are duplicated. The Tools-Annotateprocess launcher pops up the Annotate dialog box. Hereyou can either reset all designators (back to R?, C?, U? andso on) or re-designate ? parts.

To know how to identify and group multi-part components,say, how to package those five 7404 hex inverter gates intoU1, the Group Parts Together If Match By fields are used.The default is to group by the Part Type field, howevercombinations of any of the sixteen part fields and eightlibrary text fields can be used to identify a group. Use theseother fields to uniquely identify a group of parts when theymust be packaged together.

Back AnnotatingThe partner process to annotation is back annotation. InAdvanced PCB, the components on the board can have theirdesignators re-assigned on a positional basis (they can bere-annotated). If this is done, all the designator changes arewritten into a was/is file. This is a simple ascii file whichlists what each designator now is against what it was.

Page 217: USRGUIDE

User Guide

217

After re-annotation has been performed on the PCB, thedesignator changes are Back Annotated into the schematic.Selecting the Tools-Back Annotate menu item will pop upthe Was / Is File dialog box. The was/is file will have thefile extension .WAS. Select the file, press OK and thedesignators on the schematic will be updated to match thePCB.

Once the schematic has been back annotated, thenetlist no longer matches either the schematic or thePCB. It is advisable to always keep all three files thathold designator information consistent. So after re-annotation in Advanced PCB, immediately do a backannotation in Advanced Schematic and then create anew netlist.

Never re-annotate more than once in Advanced PCBwithout then doing a back annotate in AdvancedSchematic. If you do, the was list of designators in thewas/is file will no longer be a list of the schematicdesignators, but a list of your last re-annotation inAdvanced PCB. A total miss match of designators canoccur, with a painful process of manual recovery. Ifyou are unhappy with the results when you re-annotate in Advanced PCB, use Undo.

Netlist Load problems

Missing components or pins (PCB layout)Advanced PCB reports missing component patterns ormissing pins when loading the netlist. These are usually dueto the following problems:

• The package description (or Footprint) is missing fromthe schematic component information in the netlist, orthe package in the schematic does not match anyAdvanced PCB library component. Make sure every partin your schematic has a footprint and that there is a PCB

Page 218: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

218

component with this name in a PCB library when youload the netlist (the library must be open in AdvancedPCB too).

It may be necessary to re-edit the schematic to include theFootprint information, or additional Advanced PCB librarycomponents may need to be created to match any uniquefootprints in the design.

• If all components are present but pins are reportedmissing, the cause is usually that the pin numbering ofthe schematic component differs from PCB component.

Schematic libraries contain specific components anddevices. PCB component (decal) libraries contain genericfootprints which can belong to various specific components- each having different pin assignments.

For example, a transistor shape can represent variouscombinations of “E,” “B” and “C,” -- each of which must beassigned to the correct pin number in the PCB layoutsystem. Diodes are a similar case, with pins often named“A” and “K” in the schematic.

One solution is to leave the schematic pin designations as“E,” “B” and “C” and then place components on the PCBand change the pad designators to match. If you have a lotof pin outs in the same orientation, you may want to make aspecial version of the component in the library using thecorrect pin identifiers. Another strategy is to use numbers inthe schematic component pin number field and use the E, BC in the pin name field.

Page 219: USRGUIDE

User Guide

219

Advanced Topics

Sheet templates

Re-entrant editing

Global editing

importing and exporting to databases

SPICE interface

EEsof interface

Xilinx interface

OrCAD compatibility

Protel DOS Schematic compatibility

Page 220: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

220

Resource Management

Advanced Schematic allows the user to ‘capture’ theirschematic on a computer. To do this, components are placedfrom libraries and these components are then ‘wired’ tocreate the schematic.

All the ‘doing’ functions in Advanced Schematic, such asplacing a component or a wire, changing the zoom level,redrawing the screen and so on, are performed byprocesses. To access these processes, Advanced Schematicprovides a set of resources.

Resources are the mechanism through which you launchprocesses. To place a wire you can press the wire button onthe wiring toolbar. The wiring toolbar is a resource.Alternatively, you could select the Place-Wire menu item.Menus are also a resource. The other method of invoking aprocess is to use the third set of resources available,shortcut keys.

All the resources available in Advanced Schematic are fullycustomizable. New menus, toolbars and shortcut key listscan be created and all can be modified.

Advanced Schematic ResourcesAdvanced Schematic is supplied with a set of defaultresources for both the Schematic Sheet and SchematicLibrary document editors These default resources include;

Schematic Sheet EditorSchematicLongMenuSchematicShortMenuSchematicToolsWiringTools

Page 221: USRGUIDE

User Guide

221

DrawingToolsSchematicHotKeysSchematic Library EditorSchLibLongMenuSchLibShortMenuSchLibToolsSchLibDrawingToolsSchLibIEEEToolsSchLibHotKeys

The default resources provided with Advanced Schematicare defined in a resource file. Advanced Schematic, like allservers that run in EDA Client, has a default resource filewith the file extension RCS. This file contains thedefinitions of the default menus, toolbars and shortcut keylists for both the Schematic Sheet Editor and the SchematicLibrary Editor. These resources are known as systemresources and can not be removed from the environment.Customization of resources are not stored in this file.

When the Advanced Schematic server is first installed, theresource definitions are read from the Advanced SchematicRCS file and added to the Client RCS file. Anymodifications or additions made to Advanced Schematicresources are then recorded in the Client RCS file. It is notnecessary for the user to edit this file, as all resourcecustomization can be performed from within AdvancedSchematic.

EDA Client ResourcesThe total pool of resources available in EDA Client includesthose provided by Client, as well as any resources providedby installed servers, such as Advanced Schematic. The firsttime a server is installed, its default resources are added tothe Client RCS file. Modifications to the resources of anyserver are recorded in the Client RCS file.

Page 222: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

222

Managing ResourcesManaging resources can be broken down into three areas,customizing, editing and configuring resources.

Customizing ResourcesWhen you would like to select a different set of shortcutkeys, change to your custom menu or display a particulartoolbar, you need to customize the resources.

Selecting the Client menu-Customize menu item pops upthe Customize Resources dialog box. This dialog boxallows you to customize the resources currently available tothe active document editor. If a schematic sheet is the activedocument then the Customize Resources dialog box willgive you access to the resources currently available to theSchematic Sheet document editor. To customize theresources of the active document editor, select the Clientmenu-Customize menu item.

Customization includes; selecting another resource fromthe list of resources available to this document editor(perhaps choosing your own specialized menu), editing aselected resource and toggling the display state of toolbars.To add or remove resources to a particular document editorrefer to Configuring Resources below.

Editing ResourcesSelecting the Client menu-Resource Editor menu item popsup the Edit Resources dialog box. This dialog box givesyou access to the entire pool of resources currentlyavailable in EDA Client. Here you can create resources andremove resources from the environment. It is also possibleto edit any of the resources currently available in the Clientenvironment. To add or remove resources to a particulardocument editor refer to Configuring Resources below.

Page 223: USRGUIDE

User Guide

223

To edit a menu, simply double click anywhere in themenu bar. To edit a toolbar simply double click on atoolbar. To edit the current shortcut key list, select theClient-menu Edit Shortcuts menu item.

Configuring ResourcesTo change what resources are available to a particulardocument editor you must configure the resources of thatdocument editor. As an example, consider the case ofconfiguring the resources available in the Schematic Sheeteditor. If you intend to add your own resource, perhaps atoolbar, first create the resource with the Resource Editor(refer to the preceding paragraph on Editing Resources). Tothen add the new toolbar to the Schematic Sheet editorresources, select the Client menu-Servers menu item. In theEDA Servers dialog box select the Sch server and press theConfigure button to pop up the Configure Server dialogbox. Now select the Sch document editor and press theToolbars button. This will pop up the Resource List Editordialog box. On the left of this dialog box is a list of alltoolbar resources currently available in the EDA Clientenvironment. On the right is a list of the toolbar resourcescurrently available to the Schematic Sheet document editor.Simply select your new toolbar in the list on the left andpress the Add button. This toolbar will now be availablewhen you edit a schematic sheet. If the toolbar does notappear when a schematic sheet is being edited it may needto be made visible. Select the Client menu-Customize menuitem to pop up the Customize Resources dialog box. Thenew toolbar should appear in the list of available toolbars.Check the check box adjacent to the toolbar name to makeit visible.

Resetting DefaultsIt is possible to return the resources of any server back totheir defaults at any time. To do this, select the Client menu-Servers menu item. In the EDA Servers dialog box, select

Page 224: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

224

the appropriate server and press the Configure button. Inthe Configure Server dialog box press the Default button.Menus, toolbars and shortcut keys for the selected serverwill be returned to their default state.

Pressing the Default button will return all theresources for all the document editors provided bythis server, back to their defaults. To selectivelyrestore resources, only customize your own resourcesso that at any stage you can selectively return to thestandard resources. To create your own resources,refer to the Editing Resources section of this chapter.To customize your own resources, refer to theCustomizing Resources section of this chapter. Tomake your own resources available, refer to theConfiguring Resources section of this chapter.

Page 225: USRGUIDE

User Guide

225

Sheet Templates

The sheet border, title block and included graphics make upwhat is referred to as the sheet template. AdvancedSchematic is supplied with a number of sheet templates, onefor each size of sheet available. Sheet templates are savedwith a .DOT file extension.

User defined sheet templates can be created. They arecreated in the same environment used for schematic editing.Once created, these pre-defined templates can be applied tonew or existing projects.

As well as including custom title blocks and graphics, sheettemplates can include special strings to automatically adddocument text when printing or plotting.

Special StringsSpecial strings are text strings which are recognized byAdvanced Schematic and interpreted when the sheet isprinted or plotted. Each special string either links to a fieldin the Organization Tab of the Document Options dialogbox, such as .TITLE, or provides current information, suchas .DATE. Special text strings can be placed either on asheet template or on a schematic sheet.

By placing the special strings on your sheet template, eachtime you do a new design you will not need to accuratelyplace text, of the right font style and size, on every sheet.You simply go to the Document Options dialog box for thatsheet and fill in the fields. When the sheet is printed, eachspecial string will be replaced by the text you entered intothe appropriate field of the Document Options dialog box.If you wish to see the text that was entered in the DocumentOptions dialog box on the sheet, rather than waiting till it is

Page 226: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

226

printed, check the Convert Special Strings check box in theGraphical Edit Tab of the Preferences dialog box (Options-Schematic Preferences).

Use special string with your templates to providequick and consistent document text.

The Special string that are linked to the Document Optionsdialog box are;

.ORGANIZATION Lists Organization field text.

.ADDRESS1 Lists text from first Address field.

.ADDRESS2 Lists text from second Addressfield.

.ADDRESS3 Lists text from third Addressfield.

.ADDRESS4 Lists text from fourth Addressfield.

.SHEETNUMBER Lists text from Sheet No. field.

.SHEETTOTAL Lists text from Sheet Total field.

.TITLE Lists the Document Title text.

.DOCUMENTNUMBER Lists the Document No. text.

.REVISION List the Document Revision text.The following special strings automatically insert thecurrent information at the time the document is printed.

.DOC_FILE_NAME The name of the schematic sheetfile.

.TIME The current time.

.DATE The current date.To place a special string use the Place-Annotation processlauncher (shortcut: P, T).

Creating a TemplateTo define a template, first choose File-New to load anempty sheet into the workspace, then:

Page 227: USRGUIDE

User Guide

227

1. Choose Options-Document Option, Sheet OptionsTab.

2. Select the sheet size in the Standard Styles pull down.

3. Un-mark the Title Block check box and click OK.

Notice that the standard title block no longer appears on thepage. Zoom-in to the bottom right corner of the page to starta custom title block.

Now to draw a new title block:

4. Choose the graphical line tool from the DrawingTools palette or use the Place- Line menu item.

5. Before starting the line, press the TAB key.

The Line dialog box opens.

6. Click in the Color box to open the Color Selector,then scroll up to color number 4 (black).

7. Click OK to close the Color Selector dialog box thenclick OK in the Line dialog box to accept this change.

8. Now, position the cursor in the sheet workspace andclick to begin the first title block line segment.

9. Click to mark the end of each segment, continue untilyou have defined a box.

10. Press ESC key once to end the line and press ESC againto exit the Place Line command.

11. Turn the snap grip off prior to placing text (View-Snap Grid).

Now place text in the title block:

12. Choose Place-Text-Annotation from the menu bar.

Page 228: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

228

13. Before placing the text, press the TAB key to changethe text attributes.

14. Press the Font Change button.

15. In the Size field, type 16 and Click OK.

16. In the Text field type .TITLE and then click OK.

The special string .TITLE is mapped to the Title field in theDocument Options dialog box. Continue to define yourcustom title block:

17. Position the cursor in the appropriate region of yournew title block, then click OK.

18. Press TAB to pop up the Annotation dialog box again.Enter the .DOCUMENTNUMBER special string andset the font to an appropriate size. Continue to placethe special strings in the appropriate regions of yourtitle block.

19. Press ESC to exit the place text annotation command.

20. Graphics can be included in the template. Use thePlace-Graphic process launcher to place a graphic onyour template.

When you place a graphic the graphical image is notincluded in the document, only a pointer to thegraphic file. If you move the design to another PC, thegraphic file will need to move too.

Now save this sheet as a template:

20. Choose File-Save As from the menu bar.

Page 229: USRGUIDE

User Guide

229

21. Type MY_SHEET.DOT (or whatever name you wouldlike to use) in the Filename field. Before you clickOK, check the Path to see where the template will besaved. The default location for Protel sheet templatesis the \ADVSCH directory. If necessary, changedirectories and click OK.

The extension .DOT defines this file as a sheet template.This template can be loaded into a single existing sheet oran entire hierarchical project.

Don’t forget to turn the snap grid back on after youfinish designing your template.

Your template is now ready for use. You can specify thatthis template be used automatically whenever a new file iscreated. To do this select the Options-SchematicPreferences menu item. In the Preferences dialog box, at thebottom of the Schematic Tab, press the Browse button.Locate and select your template. When you click OK andreturn to the Preferences dialog box, your template namewill appear in the Default Template File field. Click OK toclose the dialog box. When you select File-New, the newsheet will use your template. Note that the objects that makeup the template can not be edited now, any changes have tobe made to the template itself.

Templates can also be applied to the active sheet or all opensheets at any time. The Options menu has three menu itemsfor working with templates;

• Update Current Template - use this if you have modifieda template and need to “re-fresh” the sheets which use it.You will be asked if you wish to update the template forall currently open files. Click No if you wish to only re-fresh the active sheet.

• Set Template File Name - this removes the existingtemplate and uses the one you choose.

• Remove Template - removes the template (but retains thesheet size from the old template).

Page 230: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

230

Page 231: USRGUIDE

User Guide

231

Re-entrant Editing

Advanced Schematic allows the user to launch a processwhilst currently executing a process. This facility is knownas re-entrant editing. This is a powerful feature, allowingyou to perform an operation without having to quit from theoperation you are currently carrying out.

Re-entrant editing allows you to work more flexibly andintuitively. For example, you start placing a wire thenremember that it is to be connected to a port. There is noneed to drop out of Place Wire mode, simply press the PlacePort shortcut keys (P, R), place the port first and thenconnect the wire to it.

Accessing another process while executing a processis only possible via the shortcut keys.

Any number of processes can be competed within anotherprocess. The number of times another process can belaunched before the current process is complete depends onthe demands each of these incomplete processes is placingon the software. For graphical type processesapproximately ten processes can be nested. A dialog boxwill pop up if the limit has been reached.

A simple example of this feature is to change views whileplacing an object, then place an object whilst alreadyplacing an object.

• Open a new schematic sheet (F, N)• Change the zoom level to fit the entire sheet (V, F)• Select the Place-Port menu item• The crosshair cursor will appear with a power port

floating on it.

Page 232: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

232

• While the power port is still floating on the cursor,change the zoom level by press the V, A shortcut keys.

• The power port will disappear from the cursor. Click leftto define the first corner, drag across to define a smallview area and click left again.

• You will zoom in and the power port will re-appear.• Before placing the power port, press the P, W shortcut

keys to put you in place wire mode.• Again the power port will disappear. click left to define

the start point of the wire. Move the mouse across andclick again to place a wire segment. Place a few morewire segments.

• Click right mouse to terminate this wire, then click leftmouse to drop out of place wire mode.

• The power port will re-appear on the cursor, ready forplacement.

Page 233: USRGUIDE

User Guide

233

Global Editing

As well as being able to edit the attributes of a single object,Advanced Schematic also allows you to apply these edits toother objects of the same type on the current document, orif you wish across the entire project .

Additionally, you can further define conditions that eitherextend or restrict global changes. For example, changes canbe applied to all objects that are selected or all objects thatare not currently selected, or the change can be appliedwithout regard to the object’s selection status. If desired,you can create a complex set of conditions for applyingchanges.

Virtually every one of these editable object attributes canbe globally applied. A simple example would be changingthe color assigned to all wire segments associated with aspecific net. In another instance the designer may wish tochange the color of all wires associated with a certain linewidth, etc. These options (and more) are possible withglobal editing. The possible applications for global changesare limited only by the imagination of the design engineer.

The large number of global change options may makethis feature appear somewhat complex at first.However, the principles of applying global changesare reasonably simple, once understood. Whenmastered, this feature can be an importantproductivity tool that can save a great deal of manualediting of a schematic.

Each object’s dialog box may contain different optionssince each object type may have unique attributes.

Page 234: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

234

Cross-project global editingAdvanced Schematic supports global editing of schematicobjects throughout a multi-sheet, hierarchical project. Thisfeature allows users to change items located in various partsof a project or impose style changes throughout all opensheets in the current project.

Global Editing StrategiesWhile the presentation of global change options mayappear differently in the various object dialog boxes, thestrategy used is always the same. This description willoutline the approach to global editing.

Current AttributesWhen you double click on an object, you are presented withthe dialog box for that type of object. This dialog boxcontains the current values or settings of the attributes ofthat object.

Change the attributes you would like to alter.

Pressing the Options button will extend the dialog box(except for the Edit Part dialog box, which has no Optionsbutton as the Match By and Copy Attributes columns arealready available).

Attributes to Match ByIn the center of the dialog box there will now be a columntitled Attributes To Match By. In the Attributes To MatchBy column you define how you want to identify the otherobjects to apply the global change to.

The Attributes To Match By column will contain either achoice field for each attribute or a text field which you cantype in.

The choice field has three options: Same (apply globalchanges if this object attribute is matched in the targetobject); Different (apply global changes if this attribute is

Page 235: USRGUIDE

User Guide

235

not a match in the target object) and Any (the default)which applies the change irrespective of whether theattribute has the same value in both objects.

If the Match By attributes are all set to any and the textfields contain the wildcard symbol (*), then the globalchange will apply to all objects of this type.

Use combinations of Match By attributes to define aparticular set of objects to apply the change to.

Copy AttributesThe third column in the dialog box is titled Copy Attributes.This column will contain either a check box for eachattribute or a text field which you can type in.

In this column you specify which of the attributes you wantto copy the changes to, and if the attribute has a text fieldwhat new text value to copy to all matched objects.

Change ScopeThe last parameter to set is the change scope. This will be;the current item, all matching items in this document, or allmatching items in the documents that make up the project.Other open documents which are not part of the project willnot be affected.

Any attribute can be globally changed if the object’s dialogbox includes a Match By and Copy field for that Attributefield.

Using wildcards when globally editing textMany objects include text fields. These text fields allowyou to use wildcards to define changes. This applies toparts, net labels, annotations (single line text), sheetsymbols, sheet entries, ports and power ports.

Separate Edit-Find Text and Edit-Replace Text processlaunchers allow text replacement across different object

Page 236: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

236

types. These processes also support the wildcard search andreplace syntax, described below.

Syntax for wildcard search and replace editsThe Match By field defines which strings will be edited. If *is displayed (the default), all strings for this field areavailable to be globally edited. This can be limited bydefining specific cases, for example S* will limit the fieldsto strings beginning with S, etc. Wildcards are case in-sensitive.

The Copy field for text strings is used to define the changesto be made to the string. This field can be used in two ways.

If you wish to replace the entire contents of this field with anew value, remove the braces, “{” and “}” and enter thenew value.

If you only want to replace a portion of the text in this field,then the syntax is {oldtext=newtext}. This means, changethe portion of the string "oldtext" to "newtext". You can usemultiple sets of brackets to define complex replacements. Inthis case the leftmost replacement is made, then the nextone, etc. Although this is very powerful, you must take care,because the first change can effect subsequentreplacements, possibly generating an unexpected result.

An example of when string substitution might be used is ifyou needed to change all the IC designators from IC1, IC2,IC3, ... to U1, U2, U3, .... In this case the syntax for the CopyAttributes Designator field would be {IC=U}.

You can further limit the replacement by typing{!Text=text} to make the changes case sensitive. In thiscase, "Text" becomes "text". Otherwise replacement is casein-sensitive by default.

Any mistakes can be undone by the Undo feature.

Page 237: USRGUIDE

User Guide

237

SummaryWith care and planning the designer can experiencesignificant productivity benefits from this powerful feature.However, the very power of these options can contribute tosome unanticipated results -- particularly when complexselections are globally edited. When in doubt, it’s alwayssafest to De-Select All (shortcut: X, A), then create a freshselection. Remember, the Undo/Redo features allow you torecover several operations, if required. However, it isrecommended that you maintain adequate back-up versionsof your work files as well. It is also prudent to maintain aseparate archived version of the work file.

Page 238: USRGUIDE
Page 239: USRGUIDE

User Guide

239

Linking to Databases

Advanced Schematic includes two powerful and flexiblemethods of linking to external databases.

• ‘Hot linking’ of component part fields to externaldatabases. This feature allows mapping of externaldatabase information directly to the component partfields on the schematic sheet.

• Database import and export features. These allow you toexport and import the value of any attribute, of anyobject, placed in the Schematic Sheet Editor.

Each of these methods of linking to a database is describedin detail below.

Hot Linking to a DatabaseHot linking to a database allows real time merging ofexternal database information with the part fields of thecomponents used in your schematic.

The links that are created to an external database do notbelong to a individual component or an particular sheet,they are applied to every component on every sheet that isopened in Advanced Schematic. These links are stored inthe Advanced Schematic INI file and are available eachtime Advanced Schematic is run.

To define the links, select the Options-SchematicPreferences menu item to pop up the Preferences dialogbox and select the Database Links Tab. Each of the sixteencomponent part fields can be linked to a database. They canall be linked to the same database, or each to a differentdatabase.

Page 240: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

240

Establishing the LinksTo establish the links between a part field and a database,press one of the Links For Part Field... buttons. This willpop up the Database Linking Configuration for Part Field(X) dialog box.

The first step is to check the Enable External Link checkbox. The next step is to select the database you wish to linkto. Enter the Database Filename (including the full path) oruse the browse button to locate the database. Once thedatabase is selected you must map the key fields.

To facilitate rapid enabling and disabling of theexternal links, there is check box beside each LinksFor Part Field... button in the Database Links Tab ofthe Preferences dialog box.

Mapping the Key FieldsThe purpose of mapping the key fields is to establish how toidentify the desired record in the external database. Forexample, consider a database that contains a list ofcomponents, with each component record including detailslike tolerance, supplier, price etc. You may wish to use thecomponent name in the database as the record identifier.This field name could then be mapped to the schematiccomponent’s library reference, so that when their contentsmatch the link is established. Once the link is establishedbetween a record in the database and a component partfield, the contents of any field in that record can beextracted from the record and loaded into the componentpart field.

The Key Fields region of the Database LinkingConfiguration for Part Field (X) dialog box contains twodrop down list boxes. The Database drop down list box willcontain a list of the field names in the linked externaldatabase. Select which database field you wish to use as therecord identifier.

Page 241: USRGUIDE

User Guide

241

The Schematic drop down list box will contain a list of allof the editable attributes of a schematic part. Select whichpart attribute you wish to match against the database field.

To successfully link to an external database, thecontents of the Key Fields must match. For example,if you map a database field with the nameCompName, to the schematic component attributeLibReference, when the contents of CompName is thesame as the component LibReference, the link isestablished. The contents of one of the fields of thisrecord will then be transferred to the part field.

Mapping the DataThe final step in establishing the link is to identify whichfield in the database will provide the information to loadinto this component part field. For the example mentionedabove, where the component name in the database ismapped to the component library reference, you may wishto extract the price information for this component and loadit into this part field.

To map which database field is to have its contents loadedinto the part field, select the field name in the DatabaseData Field drop down list box. For the above examplewhere you wished to extract the price information, the nameof the field which contains the price information would beselected.

Once the linking is finalized, click OK to close the DatabaseLinking Configuration for Part Field (X) dialog box.

Updating the DataThe links between databases and component part fields aredynamic. That is, the information can be refreshed to keep itup to date. This can be done manually at any time bypressing the Update button in the Database Links Tab of thePreferences dialog box, or it can be done automatically atthe time interval specified.

Page 242: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

242

Using an Index FileIf the database that is being linked to is large, updates cantake a long time as Advanced Schematic scans the databaseattempting to match field contents for each part in theschematic. To speed this process, an index file can becreated for each database being linked too. An index fileprovides a fast search mechanism for Advanced Schematicto locate a record in a database. If you wish to create anindex file, simply press the Rebuild Index File(s) Rebuildbutton. An index file will be created for each databasebeing linked too. The button is labeled Rebuild to remindyou that if the external database is being changed, forexample records added or removed, then the index fileshould periodically be rebuilt to ensure the database isbeing searched correctly. If an index file exists, it will beused for searching. If there is no index file then the actualdatabase will be searched.

Importing and Exporting to a DatabaseEach object (or primitive) that can be placed in AdvancedSchematic has a set of attributes. For example, a wire hasthree attributes; color, width and selection. A componenthas 33 attributes. The import and export facilities allow youto select which attributes are to have their valuestransferred to or from the database, it may be for two of theattributes, or it may be all. You can also specify the scopeof the export or import. The scope can be the current sheet,the current project or all open sheets.

Once the values of the selected attributes have beenexported into a database, they can then be processed by anyDBMS (DataBase Management System) or spreadsheetapplication that can read the chosen database format. Thesupported formats include dBase III and dBase IV. Thequerying, manipulation and editing facilities of the DBMScan then be used to edit the database.

Page 243: USRGUIDE

User Guide

243

To be able to successfully export to a database, manipulatethe data and then import from that database, there needs tobe some way of uniquely identifying each instance of aprimitive within the scope of the import. To identify eachprimitive on the sheet and on which sheet that primitivebelongs, primitives include special location attributes.There are two special location attributes. Every primitivehas the Document File Name attribute to identify whichsheet it came from. Primitives which do not have their ownX - Y location information, such as wires or lines, also havea Vertex Array attribute which creates an array of thevertices that make up each wire or line. When importingfrom a database these location attributes are then used asKey Attributes, attributes which the software will use toidentify each instance of a primitive as it loads theinformation from the database.

Exporting to a DatabaseSelecting the File-Export to Database process launcher willpop up the Export to Database dialog box.

Page 244: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

244

A default name will be provided for each database youexport, based on the primitive selected.

Selecting the PrimitivesThe Primitives list box provides access to each of theprimitives (or objects) available in Advanced Schematic.The desired primitives are selected and added to theSelected Primitives list box.

Once a primitive is added you then select which attributesof that primitive you would like to export in the Attributeslist box. Continue with this process for each of theprimitives you require; select the primitive, then select theattributes for that primitive. Remember, for each primitiveselected there will be a separate database created.

For each primitive that is selected, a separatedatabase will be created.

Each type of attribute will become a field of cells in thedatabase, which must be identified. A field name is

Page 245: USRGUIDE

User Guide

245

automatically assigned for each type of attribute when youexport to a database.

Selecting the AttributesFor each primitive you select, you choose which attributesof that primitive are to be exported.

When exporting, you must include the appropriatelocation attributes if you intend to later import thedatabase. Without these location identifiers, theimport feature will not be able to match the databasefields with each instance of the primitive on theirrespective sheets.

Setting the ScopeOnce the primitives and their attributes have been selected,set the export scope. The Schematic Sheet Editor has threeoptions for the scope, the Current Sheet, the Current Projector All Open Sheets.

Export ReportAfter the export process is complete a report file will begenerated and opened in Text Expert. The report will list alldatabase files that have been created and the number ofrecords written to each file.

Importing from a DatabaseSelecting the File-Import from Database process launcherwill pop up the Import from Database dialog box. Locateand select the database file and click OK. This will pop upthe Add New primitive To Schematic dialog box, whereprimitive will be the name of the type of primitives stored inthe chosen database.

Page 246: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

246

Importing from a database is a process of transferringinformation in the database to instances of primitives inyour design. To achieve this you must establish what youwish to extract from the database and identify where it is togo. To establish what you wish to extract, you map theDatabase Fields to the Schematic Object’s Attributes. Toidentify where it is to go you must set the scope in theImport Options and the check the Key Attributes.

Mapping the AttributesIn the Database Fields list box select the field you wish toimport from. Then select which of the Schematic Object’sAttributes this field is to map to, and press the >> Mapbutton. If the contents of that field can be mapped to thechosen attribute, they will appear in the Mapped Attributeslist box. If the field chosen in the database cannot bemapped to that attribute of the object, a dialog box will popup warning that they are not the same Type. To be the sametype, they must both be integers or real numbers or asciivalues etc.

Setting the KeyTo identify how to locate an object on a sheet, key field(s)must be selected. Each attribute in the Mapped Attributeslist box has a check box next to it. The check box specifiesif an attributes is to be used as a key field.

Page 247: USRGUIDE

User Guide

247

In the Mapped Attributes list box, select an attribute whichuniquely identifies an instance of that object and check itscheck box. Examples of appropriate key attributes are Xlocation, Y location, Document File Name and VertexArray. You must select the appropriate key attributes toidentify each instance of the object for the scope of theimport. If the import scope is current sheet, X location andY location (or vertex array) will be sufficient. If the scope isover more than one sheet, include the Document File Nameattribute as well.

Import Options - ScopeAs with exporting, the scope of the import includes theCurrent Sheet, the Current Project and All Open Sheets. TheOnly Selected Items check box allows you to further narrowthe scope.

Import Options - ActionThere are three ways the data being imported from thedatabase can be used. The data can be;

• imported as new objects - use this option to create a newschematic from the information in the database.

• used to update existing objects - use this option if youare updating an existing design.

• update existing objects if they exist and add new objectsif they do not - use this option if you wish to update anexisting design and add new objects to the sheet.

Page 248: USRGUIDE
Page 249: USRGUIDE

User Guide

249

Spice Interface

Advanced Schematic includes support for interfacing fromschematic capture to a SPICE or PSPICE analog simulator.This support includes;

• SPICE component library• PSPICE component library• Exporting of simulation parameters into netlists• SPICE netlist creation option• SPICE MAP file creation

SPICE netlist supportThe SPICE netlist option has some unique options,compared to other netlist formats. These options allow theuser to extract the necessary information to generate aSPICE netlist file directly from the schematic.

Berkeley Spice currently supports both numeric (NetNumbers) and alphanumeric (Net Names) net identifiers.Earlier versions of SPICE (and some commercial SPICEprograms) only support net numbers.

When you generate a SPICE format netlist, AdvancedSchematic will give the option of net names or net numbers.If you choose to use net numbers, then Advanced schematicwill generate net identifiers starting at 10000. If you placenet labels on the schematic sheet, they will be ignoredunless they are numeric. For example the net label 27 willbe used in the netlist, but the net label VCC1 will beoverridden by a numeric net identifier greater than 10000.If you choose net names instead of numbers then all netlabels from the schematic will be used.

Page 250: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

250

Auto-generated numeric net names begin with“10000.”

SPICE Text FramesIf you have a text frame with the word SPICE as the firstline, then all the information stored in that text frame willbe dumped directly at the beginning of the Spice netlist file.You can have any number of these Spice text frames,anywhere in the schematic project and all will be includedat the beginning of the Spice netlist file, so things likemodel information for components, etc. will be placed herealong with directives to the Spice compiler, such as probe.A sample of the spice format text frame can be found at theend of this chapter.

The Spice keyword is not added to the netlist.

OrCAD Pipe directives are converted to text frameswhen loading OrCAD schematics.

Voltage and Current SourcesIn the SPICE.LIB library there are special components forvoltage and current sources. These should be used to insertstimulus information into the netlist file. For Example, if anindependent voltage source is required between net 13 andGround then the required line in the file may be

VIN 13 0 AC 1 SIN(0 0.1 5MEG)

To create this line, set the designator of the voltage sourcecomponent to VIN, and the part type to "AC 1 SIN(0 0.15MEG)", Advanced Schematic will add the required nodesnumbers.

Spice Power PortsFor compatibility with OrCAD, Power Ports can be used topass information about power inputs to the Spice netlist. Ifthe string "AC" or "DC" appears in a power object, then a

Page 251: USRGUIDE

User Guide

251

special conversion is done on the string net power objectand it is written to the Spice netlist in a special format. Forexample, if you have a power object and the string in thepower object is "VCC DC 12" then one of the nets that iscreated as VCC, will have the attribute DC 12 attached to itin Spice format. In addition, in the MAP file, that sameinformation will be written out as the net name VCC DC 12.

Map filesThe Spice format creates two MAP files in addition to thenetlist files. A list of the node numbers, cross referenced tothe net names is placed in the first MAP file because manySpice systems can't handle alphanumeric net names. Also,it's important to use the Spice library, because Spicesystems can only support numeric node numbers (or pinnames). So, for example, if you have a transistor, you haveto convert E, B and C to 1,2 and 3, etc. Protel will add alibrary called SPICE which will have components in thoseformats. Users should either restrict component use to theSpice library, or modify their transistor libraries, etc. tosupport those conventions.

You can embed text in a schematic which will be compiledinto a Spice netlist by placing a text frame(s) on any part ofyour project. Each text frame must start with the wordSPICE on the first line of the text box and any furtherinformation is placed on the proceeding lines.

Sample Text FrameBelow is a complete example of text inserted in a text framefor use in a Spice netlist.

SPICESPICE EXAMPLE CIRCUIT

* CONTROL STATEMENTS

.OPT ACCT LIST NODE OPTS

.WIDTH OUT=80

.TEMP 35

.OP

Page 252: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

252

.TF V(5) VIN

.DC VIN -0.25 0.25 0.005

.AC DEC 10 10KHZ 10MEG

.TRAN 5NS 500NS

.SENS V(5)

.NOISE V(5) VIN 20

.FOUR 5MEG V(5)

.DISTO RC1

.MODEL QNL NPN (BF=80 RB=100 CCS=2PF TF=0.3NS TR=6NSCJE=3PF CJC=2PF VA=50)

* OUTPUT STATEMENTS

.PRINT DC V(4) V(5) I(VCC)

.PLOT DC V(4) V(5)

.PRINT AC VM(5) VP(5)

.PLOT AC VM(5) VP(5)

.PRINT NOISE INOISE ONOISE

.PLOT NOISE INOISE ONOISE

.PRINT TRAN/ALL V(4) V(5) I(VCC)

.PLOT TRAN V(4) V(5) I(VCC)

.PRINT DISTO HD2 HD3

.PLOT DISTO HD2 HD3

.SAVE

This information is automatically dumped in the beginningof a SPICE netlist. Refer to On-line help for moreinformation about SPICE netlist generation.

Page 253: USRGUIDE

User Guide

253

EEsof Interface

EEsof Simulation supportAdvanced Schematic includes netlist output formats forEEsof® Libra™ and EEsof Touchstone™ and a simulationmodel library, HP-EESOF.LIB. The EEsof Touchstoneformat is for linear simulation and the EEsof Libra format isfor non-linear simulation. Both EEsof netlist formats aresaved using the special file extension “.CKT.”

Setting component parametersComponent objects have been specially extended toencompass the EEsof simulation parameters. Users candefine simulation parameters in an existing part using theextended part field controls in the library editor and theEdit Part dialog box.

Page 254: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

254

Part Fields 1-8 Tab of an Edit Part dialog box for an EEsof part. In thislibrary, part fields have been named for the simulation parameters. Theseparameters are compiled into the CKT block of an EEsof Libra or EEsofTouchstone netlist.

When an EEsof netlist is output from Advanced Schematic,part field names and the text in the part fields of acomponent are compiled directly into the netlist. Part fieldtext is defined in the dialog box for the part. Part fieldnames are defined in the library editor. See the LibraryEditor chapter for more information on defining part fieldnames.

When an EEsof netlist is output any text in the part fields ofa component are compiled into the CKT section of thenetlist and an equal sign “=” is automatically placedbetween the part field name and the part field text. For thecomponent shown in the previous diagram the followingwould appear in the CKT section of the netlist;

!Microstrip Lange CouplerMLANG_T38 516 519 517 518 &W=1.8 &S=1 &L=100 &W1^W50

Page 255: USRGUIDE

User Guide

255

Several conventions are used to conform to the syntax ofthe EEsof netlist. See your EEsof documentation for moreinformation on netlist syntax, usage and parameterdefinitions. The following marks are used in part fieldnames to indicate the use or syntax:

indicates an optional parameter;

< > indicates the text in the part field will appear in theEEsof netlist on a line by itself;

(=) indicates no “=” will be inserted between the partfield name and the text in the part field.

The following mark is used only in a part field:

^ inserted before a character in a part field overridesthe default “=” inserted between the part field nameand the part field.

Embedded text blocksYou can embed text in a schematic which will be compiledinto an EEsof netlist by placing a text frame(s) on any partof your project. Each text frame must start with the syntax“EESOF_<DataBlockName>”, where <DataBlockName> isthe name of the data type being defined. This must appearon the first line (by itself) and any further informationplaced on subsequent lines.

Page 256: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

256

Embedded text frames are used to place information into a section of anEEsof netlist, specified by the data block name, on the first line of the

text frame. This example is from the file EESOF1.PRJ.

General simulation settingsWhen the EEsof Touchstone or Libra netlist format isdesignated during netlisting, a special dialog box isdisplayed:

Page 257: USRGUIDE

User Guide

257

This dialog box opens when the Tools-Create Netlist process launcher isused and an EEsof format is designated.

This dialog box allows users to select the desired unitvalues for each simulation measurement field. For example,for Frequency the designer can choose from the units GHz,Hz, KHz or MHz. This information is attached to the DIMsection of an EEsof netlist.

Page 258: USRGUIDE
Page 259: USRGUIDE

User Guide

259

Xilinx Interface

Advanced Schematic can be used to perform the designentry stage of the Xilinx FPGA design process. AdvancedSchematic supports the hierarchical design methodologyused by Xilinx and can produce a Xilinx .XNF hierarchicalformat netlist, ready for processing by the Xilinx XMakeutility.

GeneralThe FPGA design can be partitioned in a structured, logicalmanner over a number of schematic sheets, using either thesimple or complex hierarchical models. Refer to the chapterMulti-Sheet Designs and Project Management for moreinformation on hierarchical designs.

Protel Advanced Schematic supports Xilinx Unifiedlibraries and XNF 5.0. The special libraries suppliedimplement the complete Xilinx Unified Library symbol set.The netlist generator uses information encoded in thecomponent fields of these libraries to generate the XNF 5.0files.

LibrariesThe following libraries should be used for all Xilinxdesigns created using Advanced Schematic.

2000 Series - XC2000.Lib

3000 Series - XC3000.Lib

4000 Series - XC4000.Lib

Page 260: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

260

7000 Series - XC7000.Lib

XBLOX designs - XBlox.Lib

Special Library FieldsIn these libraries the first four library text fields arereserved.

Library Field 1

LibName The component library name

Library Field 2

Flags PRIMITIVE, XMACRO, UNIFIED

Library Field 3

PrimName for example, AND3B1 becomes AND

Library Field 4

ExtraParams for example, INIT=S for some IO D Flip-Flops

Components

2000 AND 3000 Family CLB and IOB ComponentsParameters are passed to CLB and IOB components via thecomponent Part Fields. Part Field 1 must contain the stringCFG to indicate that configuration parameters follow. Anexample of the syntax to pass parameters to CLB and IOBcomponents is;

Part Field 1: CFG

Part Field 2: CONFIG X:F G:QY DX:F CLK:K

Part Field 3: BASE FG

Part Field 4: EQUATE F=((A@B)*~C)

Page 261: USRGUIDE

User Guide

261

Part Field 5: EQUATE G=((A@B)*~C)

The XNF netlist for this SYMbol will then include;

CFG, CONFIG X:F G:QY DX:F CLK:K

CFG, BASE FG

CFG, EQUATE F=((A@B)*~C)

CFG, EQUATE G=((A@B)*~C)

Symbols

Pad SymbolsUPAD Connects the I/O Node of an IOB to the internal PLD circuit

IOPAD Input/Output Pad

IPAD Input Pad

OPAD Output Pad

Special Purpose SymbolsMD0 Mode 0/Input pad used for readback trigger input

MD1 Mode 1/Output pad used for readback data output

MD2 Mode 2/Input pad

TMS Boundary-Scan test mode select input pad

TCK Boundary-Scan test clock input pad

TDI Boundary-Scan test data input pad

TDO Boundary-Scan test data output pad

Page 262: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

262

FMAP F Function generator partitioning control symbol

HMAP H function generator partitioning control system

IOB IOB configuration symbol

STARTUP User interface to global clock, reset and 3-state controls

TIMEGRP Schematic-level table of basic timing specification groups

TIMESPEC Schematic-level table of timing requirements

Tags

Pin TagsThese components should be placed with their pin directlyon the target pin.

I Pin name for macro - Place on net. Used to specify the pin-name on a macro symbol that connects to this net (onlyneeded if the net name is different than the macro symbol’spin name)

K Specify method of bringing in a signal that drives the clockpin of 2000 series CLB flip-flop. This tag tells the system touse the K pin of the CLB to bring in the signal.

G Specify method of bringing in a signal that drives the clockpin of 2000 series CLB flip-flop. This tag forces the G pinto be used.

P Pin lock. This adds the pin lock parameter to the PINrecord.

Signal TagsGND Ground-Connection Signal Tag

Page 263: USRGUIDE

User Guide

263

VCC VCC-Connection signal tag

C Critical - Place on net. Indicates critical path for net. XACTwill try to minimize delays on this net

X External - Place on net. XNFMAP ensures that is net is notplaced inside a the combinatorial logic of a CLB

N Non-Critical - Place on net. Indicates non-critical path fornet. XACT gives this net low priority.

L LongLine - Place on net. XACT will attempt to use a longline to route this net; this is useful for nets with high fan-out and needing long skew.

S Save - Place on net. Prevents XNFMAP from removingunconnected signals.

P Pinlock - Place on net (CLBMAP primitives only). Thisspecifies that APR is not to move the CLBMAP pin towhich the net is attached.

SC Skew-Critical - Place on net. Indicates net that is skew-critical. This net will be routed by PPR to minimizedifferences between load delays.

W Weight (Relative routing priority) - Place on net. Specifythe weight (1-99) by entering the value in Weight field forthe part.

I Place on net. Any CLB clocks driven by this net areconnected to the C input.

G CLB Clock Directive - Place on net. Any CLB clocks drivenby this net are connected to the G input.

K CLB Clock Directive - Place on net. Any CLB clocks drivenby this net are connected to the K input.

Page 264: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

264

TNM Time Name Directive - Place on net. Used in conjunctionwith TIMESPEC symbols. Add the name to the Name fieldof the part.

PIN Pin name for macro - Place on net. Used to specify the pin-name on a macro symbol that connects to this net (onlyneed if the net name is different than the macro symbolspin name)

TS TS Identifier - Place on net. Used in conjunction withTIMESPEC symbols. Place the string 'TSidentifier' eg TS01in one of the parameters fields of the part

Simulation Information

Simulation ProbesProbes can be used to pass information to the VSTsimulator. If the string CLOCK is entered into the Namefield of the Probe then the user defined parameter=TRC=CLOCK will be generated for the appropriate SIGrecord in the XNF file. If you wish to use Probe with adifferent simulator, you must place the whole parameter inthe probe. For example if the string=PROTELPROBE=CLOCK is entered into the Name field ofthe Probe the system will not generate the =TRC= prefix.

Simulation StimulusSimulation Stimulus objects can be used to passinformation to the VST simulator. If the string

0:0 500:T 1000:G:0

is placed in a simulation Stimulus then the user definedparameter

=STM=" 0:0 500:T 1000:G:0 "

Page 265: USRGUIDE

User Guide

265

will be generated for the appropriate SIG record in the XNFfile. If you wish to use a different simulator parameter youmust place the whole parameter in the simulation Stimulus.For example entering

=PROTELSTIMULUS=" 0:0 500:T 1000:G:0 "

(or whatever XNF format that the simulator supports) willresult in this entire string being added as a parameter to theSIG record and the system will not generate the =STM=prefix.

Defining Timing Requirements

TIMESPECThe TIMESPEC primitive can be used as a place holder fortiming specifications, which are called TS attributedefinitions.

These are specified in a Text Frame with the followingsyntax;

XILINX

TIMESPEC

TS01=FROM:INPADS:TO:COMPARE=30

TS02=FROM:COMPARE:TO:CONTROL=30

TS03=FROM:CONTROL:TO:CNT=30

TS04=FROM:CONTROL:TO:FREQ=20

TS05=FROM:CONTROL:TO:RANDOM=25

TS06=FROM:RANDOM:TO:COMPARE=35

TS07=FROM:RANDOM:TO:LEDS=45

TS08=FROM:FREQ:TO:SEGS=40

TS09=FROM:RANDOM:TO:COMPARE=40

TS10=FROM:RANDOM:TO:RANDOM=25

Page 266: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

266

TIMEGRPTo create a group of groups, the TIMEGRP attribute can beused. TIMEGRP is specified in a Text Frame and has thefollowing syntax;XILINX

TIMEGRP

=CNT=CCNT:DCNT

Each TIMEGRP must be in a separate text frame.

Specifying the Part TypeThe target device is specified using a text frame with thefollowing syntax;XILINX

PARTTYPE=4005PC84-4

XNF netlistsTo generate the XNF netlist select the Tools-Create Netlist.

The Netlist server must be installed to be able tocreate a netlist. To install the Netlist server, select theClient Menu-Servers process launcher. For moreinformation on installing a server, refer to the chapterA Quick Tour of EDA Client.

In the Netlist Creation dialog box set the output format toXilinx XNF 5.0. If the design has been structured in ahierarchical manner, set the Net Identifier Scope to SheetSymbol / Port Connections.

When using the XNF netlist generator, make sure that thefollowing netlist options are off.

• Append Sheet Numbers to Net Names• Descend into Sheet parts.

Page 267: USRGUIDE

User Guide

267

• Include Un-Named single pin nets.A separate XNF file will be created for each sheet in thedesign. These XNF files are merged when you run theXMake utility.

structureThe XNF netlist has the following structure

LCANET,5 header for Unified Library version 5

PROG,Protel Advanced Schematic,3.0,"Created From ENCODE.SCH at 14:38:39 on 28-May-1995" comment

PWR,0,N00207

SYM,U54,INV,SCHNM=INV,LIBVER=2.0.0 Primitive type symbol specification

SYM symbol

U54 designator (from designator field)

INV primitive name (from Library field 3)

SCHNM=INV schematic name (from Part Type field)

LIBVER=2.0.0 version of Xilinx library

PIN,I,I,N00216 pin information for one pin of U54

PIN

I pin name

I pin type (input)

N00216 name of net connecting to this pin

PIN,O,O,SW0 pin information for second pin of U54

END end of SYMbol definition

SYM,U55,INV,SCHNM=INV,LIBVER=2.0.0

PIN,I,I,N00217

PIN,O,O,SW1

END

SYM,U56,INV,SCHNM=INV,LIBVER=2.0.0

PIN,I,I,N00218

PIN,O,O,SW2

END

SYM,U151,X74_148,LIBVER=2.0.0,SYSTEM=XMACRO unified library type symbol spec.

Page 268: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

268

SYM symbol

U151 designator (from designator field)

X74_148 part type (from Part Type field)

LIBVER=2.0.0 version of Xilinx library

SYSTEM=XMACRO unified library XMACRO

PIN,A0,O,N00216 first pin specification for U151

PIN,A1,O,N00217

PIN,A2,O,N00218

PIN,EI,I,N00207

PIN,EO,O,PRESS

PIN,I0,I,IN0

PIN,I1,I,IN1

PIN,I2,I,IN2

PIN,I3,I,IN3

PIN,I4,I,IN4

PIN,I5,I,IN5

PIN,I6,I,IN6

PIN,I7,I,IN7 last pin specification for U151

END end of SYMbol definition

EOF end of XNF file

If Part fields are used, they are appended to the end of theSYM string, comma delimited in the same way.

Supplied Example ProjectsThere are four example projects supplied with AdvancedSchematic, one for each of the 2000, 3000 4000 and 7000series devices.

Page 269: USRGUIDE

User Guide

269

OrCAD Compatibility

OverviewBoth schematic sheet files and libraries from OrCAD SDT 3,SDT 4 and SDT 386+ can be used with AdvancedSchematic. OrCAD SDT files are loaded using the File-Open process launcher, just like Advanced Schematic files.All OrCAD SDT design objects are supported by theSchematic Editor. When you choose File-Save, the file canbe saved in one of the three following formats: Protelbinary (the Advanced Schematic native format), ProtelASCII (a text version of the Advanced Schematic format) orOrCAD binary.

SDT 3/4 sheet filesWhen you open an OrCAD sheet file in AdvancedSchematic, all SDT 3/4 and 386+ design objects and dataare available for editing. These sheets can be edited, savedin OrCAD SDT 4 format then re-opened and edited in SDT4.

Backwards compatibility to OrCAD SDTAdvanced Schematic supports all OrCAD SDT 3/4 and386+ design objects and other database elements when youopen OrCAD sheets. When you save an AdvancedSchematic file in OrCAD SDT format, most sheet elementsare supported at some level. However, Advanced Schematicincludes a number of attributes for objects that are notsupported by OrCAD, such as color or font assignments forindividual objects and text fields longer than 128

Page 270: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

270

characters. If you keep these limitations in mind whenworking in Advanced Schematic you will be able to save acompatible OrCAD format file.

“Fully-compatible” means that the feature will be translatedback to its normal OrCAD version, without the need toperform any manual editing or clean-up.

Feature Back-compatibility to OrCAD

Part (from OrCAD) Fully-compatible, library level textfields and text fields are limited tomaximum 128 characters.

Text Fully-compatible, limited tomaximum 128 characters per field.

Label Fully-compatible, limited tomaximum 128 characters per field..

Wire Fully-compatible.Bus Fully-compatible.Junction Fully-compatible.Bus entry Fully-compatible.Port Fully-compatible to the Module Port,

if the OrCAD Ports option is enabled(Options-Preferences dialog box).

Sheet Symbol Fully-compatibleSheet entry Fully-compatible with OrCAD sheet

net.Text Limited to 128 characters, no

support for individual font, pointsize or color assignments.

Dashed line Fully-compatible.Trace name Fully-compatible.Vector Fully-compatible.Stimulus Fully-compatible.

Page 271: USRGUIDE

User Guide

271

No connect Fully-compatible.Layout directive Fully-compatible, additional Protel-

specific fields are not supported byOrCAD SDT/PCB.

Part from Protel Vector components must haveOrCAD library entries with displaybitmaps. Connectivity is preserved ifall pins are in contact with a vectorcomponent body.

Sheet Fully-compatible.Connectivity rules OrCAD may not deem some

overlapped wires/pins as connected.All butted connections arerecognized.

Warning: Saving files in OrCAD (SDT 4) binaryformat can cause the loss of some file and primitiveinformation that is not fully-supported by the OrCADformat. Lost information may include some graphicalobjects, design object text fields exceeding 128characters, imported images, color and fontassignments, etc. Consult your OrCAD documentationto determine supported data types and limits.

OrCAD Design Objects, terminology andconventions

OrCAD Design Objects types are listed below, along withAdvanced Schematic equivalents. Other OrCAD terms andprocedures (and the Protel equivalents) are defined in theGlossary and relevant sections of the User Guide and/orReference Manual.

OrCAD object Protel equivalent

Module Port PortSheet Symbol Sheet symbol

Page 272: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

272

Sheet Net Sheet entryPower Object Power portNo Connect Suppress ERC (electrical rules

check)Trace Simulation probe directiveVector Simulation Test Vector directiveStimulus Simulation stimulus directiveLayout Directive PCB layoutTag Location markerPart PartPipelink Not required (place sheet symbol

in master sheet).

Menu commandsA listing of OrCAD commands and the AdvancedSchematic equivalent operation is available in the On-lineHelp, OrCAD SDT.

UtilitiesA number of OrCAD operations are performed by utilityprograms. A list of these utilities and the AdvancedSchematic menu command or process for performing thesame operation is included in the On-line Help, OrCADSDT.

Loading Your OrCAD STD DesignsThe first step to loading an OrCAD design into AdvancedSchematic is to transfer the libraries. OrCAD does not savethe library components with the design, so the appropriatecomponent libraries must be open in Advanced Schematicwhen the schematic is loaded.

Page 273: USRGUIDE

User Guide

273

Transferring the Libraries

OrCAD SDT 3/4 LibrariesOrCAD SDT 3/4 libraries must be de-compiled before theycan be loaded into the Advanced Schematic Library Editor.This is done by the OrCAD utility DECOMP.EXE. You cando this manually, or if this utility is in a directory in yourDOS path, then the Advanced Schematic Library Editor willdo it automatically when you load the library. Once theLibraries have been loaded, save them as Protel binary(.LIB) files.

OrCAD 386+ LibrariesThere is a different utility used to de-compile OrCAD 386+library files, a 32 bit file de-compiler. It is also calledDECOMP.EXE. With OrCAD 386+ the OrCAD 3/4 libraryde-compiler has been renamed to DECOMP16.EXE.

The Advanced Schematic library Editor needs to be able toaccess both of these utilities. To clarify the naming of theseutilities for the Library Editor, you will need to rename theOrCAD 386+ 32 bit file de-compiler, DECOMP.EXE, toDECOMP32.EXE. If you will be loading OrCAD 3/4binary libraries as well then rename the 16 bit file de-compiler DECOMP16.EXE, to DECOMP.EXE. Whenloading an OrCAD binary library the Advanced SchematicLibrary Editor checks the library and if it is an OrCAD 3/4library it runs DECOMP.EXE utility, if it is an OrCAD 386+library it will run DECOMP32.EXE.

Transferring the Schematic SheetsIn the Schematic Sheet Editor, add the Advanced Schematicversion of the appropriate OrCAD libraries to the LibraryList (Tools-Add/Remove Libraries).

Before opening the OrCAD schematic you must also set thefootprint mapping field. In the Preferences dialog box(Options-Schematic Preferences) there is a field called“Copy OrCAD Footprint From/To”. Select the part field that

Page 274: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

274

has been used in OrCAD for the footprint. When loadingOrCAD files the contents of this field will be copied to theFootprint field in Advanced Schematic. In OrCAD 3/4 thereare 8 part fields and any of the part fields can carry thefootprint name, in OrCAD 386+ part field 8 has beenrenamed to “Module Name” by default. Remember, inOrCAD you can rename the part fields so make sure youchoose the corresponding field name.

OrCAD SDT 3/4 SheetsThe OrCAD schematic is then opened like any file orproject in Advanced Schematic by selecting the File-Openmenu item.

When opening flat multi-sheet OrCAD projects, the pipelink string is converted to a sheet symbol, without sheetentries.

Make sure the full drive and path is included in thepipe link field, otherwise Advanced Schematic willnot find the file.

Depending upon how the pipe link strings are positioned inthe OrCAD sheet file, when converted the sheet symbolsmay overlap each other, you can move and re-size the sheetsymbols at any time.

OrCAD 386+ SheetsOrCAD schematic design files must be in OrCAD 3/4 formatto load into Advanced Schematic so OrCAD 386+schematic files must be converted to OrCAD SDT IVformat.

There are several ways to convert OrCAD 386+ schematicfiles, you may manually convert the files yourself by usingthe utility programs supplied by OrCAD, CONVERT.EXE or32TO16.EXE. The easiest way is to allow AdvancedSchematic to automatically run the 32TO16.EXE utility foryou. When importing OrCAD 386+ schematic files,Advanced Schematic looks in the current DOS path for the

Page 275: USRGUIDE

User Guide

275

32TO16.EXE utility. If found, Advanced Schematic usesthis utility to automatically convert and load the file. The32TO16.EXE utility also requires the OrCAD fileSDTXTEND.EXE to be in the path. These utility files aresupplied by OrCAD and should be in the directory that youinstalled the OrCAD 386+ program files. (e.g.C:\ORCADEXE).

Editing the DesignBefore you start making design changes to your schematicfiles, it is important to make sure the OrCAD Ports option isset correctly in the Preferences dialog box (Options-Schematic Preferences) This is only necessary if you willbe converting your files back to OrCAD. In OrCAD SDTthe length of the Ports is determined by the number ofcharacters used as the Port name, in Advanced Schematicthe Ports can be re-sized to any length. With this optionturned on the size cannot be changed. When saving the fileas OrCAD format the ports could be disconnected from thewires if this option is turned off and you have re-sized thePorts.

Any power objects that have been created using parts willremain as a part. It is recommended to replace the powerobject part with Power Ports. There are three extra powerports available, Power Ground, Signal Ground and Earth inAdvanced Schematic. There is no disadvantage using partsbut it is easier to manage Power Ports, especially whenchanging the net name. If you do decide to use powerobjects parts there are a couple of rules that must befollowed to make sure they are processed correctly. Thepart must have only one pin and it must be a hidden powerpin. When generating a netlist or ERC the pin will beprocessed as having 0 length, so the end of the wire must betouching the base of the hidden pin.

Page 276: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

276

Transferring the Design Back to OrCADYou can save your Advanced Schematic designs back inOrCAD SDT IV format only. Remember you must have thelibraries open in order for OrCAD to load the parts as itopens the schematics. It is not possible to save AdvancedSchematic libraries in OrCAD format, so for any new partsthat you have used or created, an equivalent part must becreated using the OrCAD library editor. To get your filesback into OrCAD 386+ you must manually use either theCONVERT.EXE or 16TO32.EXE utilities.

When converting your files back to OrCAD, make sure theSheet Path field for each part is empty. By defaultAdvanced Schematic inserts an asterisk (*) into every blankpart field. If you convert the schematic with an asterisk inthe Sheet Path field, OrCAD will generate an error whencreating netlists, electrical design checks or any commandthat requires it to descend into Sheet Parts. The easiest wayto clear this field is to do a global edit on the parts beforesaving the file. Double click on any part, press the globalbutton, and set the Sheet Path field in the Copy Attributecolumn to {* = }. Set the Change Scope to ChangeMatching Items In All Documents (it will only affect sheetsthat are in the active project, other open sheets will not beaffected). Press the OK button. This will clear all Sheet Pathfields that have an asterisk and will not clear any SheetPaths which have been set. Also remember the footprintmapping option, this also works when saving OrCAD files,it will copy the footprint field in Advanced Schematic to thespecified OrCAD part field.

Page 277: USRGUIDE

User Guide

277

Protel DOS Schematic Compatibility

OverviewAs with OrCAD SDT 3/4 and 386+ files and libraries, bothschematic sheet (.S**) files and libraries from ProtelSchematic 3.x can be used with Advanced Schematic.Protel Schematic 3 files are loaded by selecting the File-Open menu item, just like Advanced Schematic files. Whenyou choose File-Save, the file can be saved in any of thethree following formats: Protel binary (the AdvancedSchematic native format), Protel ASCII (a text version ofthe Advanced Schematic format) or OrCAD binary. There isno option for saving files in the Protel Schematic 3 format.Users of earlier version Protel Schematic or TangoSchematic system must first convert files to ProtelSchematic 3 format before these files can be opened inAdvanced Schematic.

Loading a multi-sheet DesignTo load a Schematic 3 multi-sheet design, select the File-Open menu item, tick the Project check box, locate andselect the .S01 file and click OK. All of the files that makeup the design will be opened. Also a top sheet will becreated, with a sheet symbol to represent each of theoriginal sheets. Save the design as a project via the File-Save Project menu item. For more information on multi-sheet designs and project hierarchy refer to the chapterMulti-Sheet Designs And Project Management.

Page 278: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

278

Library DifferencesThe way that Advanced Schematic handles libraries,components and library editing is fundamentally differentthan the way these functions are performed in ProtelSchematic 3. Please refer to the relevant sections of thisguide for detailed explanations regarding AdvancedSchematic library concepts.

Protel Schematic libraries are organized into a “flat”structure where each component has a unique description.All graphical representations of Schematic 3 librarycomponents (except their pins) are rendered as bitmapimages. Advanced Schematic library parts are vectorgraphic based. When converting files into AdvancedSchematic format, the differences between the two librarysystems must be reconciled to preserve connectivity. This isdone in two ways: either by substituting a vector equivalentlibrary component (if available), or creating a new vectorcomponent.

Loading Schematic 3 designs

PROTEL.LIBAdvanced Schematic is supplied with a library calledPROTEL.LIB. This library contains a vector equivalent ofall the components in the standard Schematic 3 libraries.Rather than a name like CAP or 7404, each component isidentified by a unique bitmap ID.

When you load a Schematic 3 design into AdvancedSchematic the bitmap ID is calculated for each component.PROTEL.LIB is searched for a component with thischecksum as its name. If a matching component is found,this vector equivalent is used to replace the original bitmapversion.

When a user-created component bitmap shape cannot bematched in PROTEL.LIB, Advanced Schematic will

Page 279: USRGUIDE

User Guide

279

automatically "vectorize" these parts and report them as“unmatched”. In many cases, the automatically vectorizedcomponents are perfectly acceptable, however, in somecases you may wish to improve their vector rendering.

After the loading process is complete, a report is producedwith the file extension .$$$. The report lists all thecomponents that were not available in PROTEL.LIB andhad to be converted to a vector equivalent. This reportincludes the bitmap ID for each component.

Extending PROTEL.LIBIt is advisable to check the quality of all parts thatAdvanced Schematic has re-drawn as a vector component.A project library can be created from the schematic designand loaded into the Library Editor. This library will includeall the parts in your design, not just those which have been“vectorized”.

Using the load report, locate each of the unmatchedcomponents. Use the Library Editor drawing tools to “cleanup” the component and rename the component with thebitmap ID provided in the load report (including any minussign).

Use the Copy Component or Move Component command toadd the component to the PROTEL.LIB library (this librarywill need to be open in the Library Editor to do this).

Continue this process for each of the components in thereport. When finished, save PROTEL.LIB. The projectlibrary can be discarded as all the parts needed by yourdesign are now available in PROTEL.LIB.

Bringing Across LibrariesThis approach can be used to “port” all company librariesacross to Advanced Schematic. In Schematic 3, place alllibrary components on sheets. Load these sheets intoAdvanced Schematic then use the above process to include

Page 280: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

280

these components into PROTEL.LIB. Now when you openSchematic 3 designs in Advanced Schematic all bitmapcomponents will have vector equivalents. This process willprovide a smooth translation of your company’s existingschematics from Schematic 3 to Advanced Schematic.

To port your Schematic 3 libraries across to AdvancedSchematic so that the components can be used in newdesigns, simply de-compile the libraries in SLM (DOSSchematic Library Manager). De-compiled libraries aresaved with a file extension of .SRC. These libraries can beopened in the Advanced Schematic Library Editor. Thecomponents should be checked to ensure you are happywith the “vectorizing” process.

Pin EditingSchematic 3 allows you to edit pin attributes, including pinpositions, on the fly, from inside the schematic editor. Thisis not possible in Advanced Schematic, where all changesmust be made at the library level, using the SchematicLibrary Editor. Because the Library Editor can be run at thesame time the Schematic Sheet Editor is running, it is asimple matter to switch tasks and make library levelchanges, then return to the editor. Special links areprovided that allow the user the move directly from oneeditor to another. For example, from the Library Browserwindow in the Schematic Editor, the Edit button will switchthe user directly into the library editor. The library for theselected part will be opened and the component will bedisplayed in the edit workspace. The part can be edited andthe library saved. Pressing the Update Schematic buttonwill switch you back to the Schematic Sheet Editor andupdate all instances of the edited part. Also, if you havebeen browsing through components in the Library Editor tolocate a component, pressing the Place button on theLibrary Editor main panel will return the user directly to theSchematic Editor, with the part ready to place in the currentsheet window.

Page 281: USRGUIDE

User Guide

281

Menu commandsA listing of Schematic 3 commands and the AdvancedSchematic equivalent operation is available under theSchematic 3 On-line Help system.

UtilitiesA number of Schematic 3 operations are performed byutility programs. A list of these utilities and the AdvancedSchematic menu item or process for performing the sameoperation is included in On-line Help.

Block, highlighting, etc.In Advanced Schematic the functions of the Block andHighlight commands (such as Block Define or HighlightNet) have been merged into the concept of selection. If youwish to perform an operation on a group of objects on thesheet, you first select the items, then use one of the Editmenu commands.

Page 282: USRGUIDE
Page 283: USRGUIDE

User Guide

283

ASCII File Formats

Advanced Schematic sheet and library files have defaultbinary formats. These binary files are compact and efficientwhen loading or saving. To make it easier for users todirectly access data, the system includes an option to savean ASCII version of the schematic sheet. Although theformat is complex, each field is well-annotated, so editingshould be a fairly straightforward process, once a few basicrules are understood.

The sample sheet file below includes line-by-line formatdescriptions which explain each data segment. To maintainclarity and save space, one example of each schematicobject type is illustrated in most cases. Single linedescriptions have been “exploded” so that each field can bedefined, i.e.:

0 0 'Text' This line is the field, as it appears in the ASC file.

0.............1 = bold , 0 = not bold (first “exploded” segment offield);

0...........1 = selected , 0 = not selected (second “exploded”segment);

'Text'....Text field contents (third segment in field, etc.).

The version 2.0 .ASC format includes two sections topreserve backward compatibility with version 1.0. Version2.0 data is appended to the file in a separate section. Thisallows version 1.0 of Advanced Schematic to read theversion 2.0 ASCII files. However, version 2.0-specificoptions and data will not be available for editing if the filesor libraries are loaded into the version 1.0 applications.

The structure of the format includes indented lines for“nested” data, e.g. all objects associated with a component

Page 284: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

284

(such as component text fields) are indented under the firstcomponent fields, for clarity. These indents (blank spacesinserted at the head of each line) must be maintained, whenediting files with a text editor. Text files must be maintainedin “pure” ASCII and must not contain hidden “control”characters.

If using a word processor to edit an .ASC file, make surethat the file is saved using a “Text Only” option. If youencounter problems loading a manually edited .ASC file orlibrary two format violations are likely: either a syntax orformat error exists or an out-of-range value exists. Unlesscare is taken in editing, it can be difficult to diagnose theseerrors.

Measurements and coordinates are expressed in units of .01inch each (100 = 1 inch). Coordinate range is 0-10000units, (100 x 100 inches is the maximum custom sheet sizeand defines the maximum viewing area of a sheet window).

Unless otherwise indicated, text fields have a maximumlength of 255 characters, including blank spaces. Some textfields are delimited by single quotations, e.g. 'text'. Thisformatting must be preserved when editing .ASC files.Some objects require "End markers" because the totalnumber of description lines in not fixed (e.g. a sheet symbolcan includes any number of sheet entries that are part of itsdescription).

Page 285: USRGUIDE

User Guide

285

Schematic Sheet Editor ascii file format

File header marks the start of the firstsection (1.2 file format). Version 2.0 datais appended to end of file in a separatesection.

133 A measure of the logical size of the file(based on total object number).

[Font_Table] Font table header.

1 Number of entries in the font table.

10 0 0 0 0 0 Times New Roman Font entry (each field described below):

10 Font size;

0 Orientation: 0, 90, 180, 270 deg. ;

0 1 = underline, 0 = no Underline;

0 1 = italic, 0 = no Italic;

0 1 = bold , 0 = not bold;

0 1 = strikeout , 0 = no Strikeout;

Times New Roman Font name.

EndFont End font table marker.

Library Library header.

2 Number of components in the Library.

Component Component header.

1 Number of parts in the component.

18 Number of logical components that sharethe same schematic.

[Library Name] A blank line is reserved for component’sLibrary, this field is not implemented forversion 2.0.

Description Description text field.

Blank line, if field is empty.

FOOT PRINT1 Marks footprint field 1.

RAD0.2 Footprint 1 name (this field is the defaultfor netlisting).

FOOT PRINT2 Marks footprint field 2.

Page 286: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

286

Blank line, if field is empty.

FOOT PRINT3 Marks footprint field 3.

Blank line, if field is empty.

FOOT PRINT4 Marks footprint field 4.

Blank line, if field is empty.

Library Part Field 1 Marks library Part Field 1.

Blank line, if field is empty.

Part fields 2-8 are listed in the sameformat. Part text fields 9-16 (supported byversion 2.0) are included in the Version 2section, appended to the end of theversion 1 section of the format, below.

U? Default Designator field.

Sheet Part File Name Sheet Part File Name.

Blank line, if field is empty.

PAL16L8D List of all the logical Components thatshare the same schematic (Names ofgroup members).

PAL16L8B (additional group member)

PAL16L8Q-25 (additional group member)

Part Marks first component part.

80 80 Part x and y Size (unit = .01 inch):

80 x size;

80 y size.

Rectangle 0 140 80 0 0 128 115 0 1Marks rectangle object in part graphic.

Rectangle Graphic object type identifier.

0 X location.

140 Y location.

80 X corner.

0 Y corner.

0 Line width.

128 Line color (RGB value in long integerform, converted from hexidecimal format):

$00,00,00,00 = black,

$00,FF,FF,FF = white.

Page 287: USRGUIDE

User Guide

287

115 Fill color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

11 = solid, 0 = not solid.

Pin 0 0 0 0 1 1 30 0 10 2 0 'I1' '1'Description of first pin in part.

Pin Pin object type.

0 1 = dot, 0 = no dot.

0 1 = clock, 0 = no clock.

0 Electrical attribute:

0 = input 4 = passive

1 = IO 5 = hiZ

2 = output 6 = openEmitter

3 = open Collector 7 =power

0 1 = hidden, 0 = not hidden.

1 1 = show name, 0 = hide name.

1 1 = show number, 0 = hide number.

30 Pin length.

0 X location.

10 Y location.

2 Orientation - Possible values: 0 = 0degree, 1 = 90 degrees, 2 = 180 degrees,3 = 270 degrees.

0 Pin color.

'I1' Pin name.

'1'Pin number.

EndNormalPart End-marker for normal part representation.If DeMorgan and IEEE parts are provided,these are described here in the sameformat as the normal part.

EndDeMorganPart End-marker for DeMorgan part.

EndIEEEPart End-marker for IEEE..

EndComponent End Component Description.

EndLibrary End Library

Page 288: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

288

Organization Organization info header (Documentinformation dialog box details).

Organization Marks Organization text field.Blank line, if field is empty.

Address (line 1) Marks Address line 1 text field.Blank line, if field is empty.

Address (line 2) Marks Address line 2 text field.Blank line, if field is empty.

Address (line 3) Marks Address line 3 text field.Blank line, if field is empty.

Address (line 4) Marks Address line 4 text field.Blank line, if field is empty.

Title Marks Title text field.

3 Title text.

4 Revision number text field.

1 2 Sheet number, total number of sheets.

End End marker for Organization fields.

Future 1 10 6 Was reserved for future use in version1.0. Now used for the following values:

1 1 = electrical grid enabled, 0 = disabled;

10 Electrical grid size;

6 Version 2.0 pre-defined sheet styles:

0 = A4 9 = E

1 = A3 10 = Letter

2 = A2 11 = Legal

3 = A1 12 = Tabloid

4 = A0 13 = OrCAD A

5 = A 14 = OrCAD B

6 = B 15 = OrCAD C

7 = C 16 = OrCAD D

8 = D 17 = OrCAD E

EndFuture End marker for Future data.

Sheet Header for Sheet information section.

0 6 0 1 1 0 15269887 1 10 1 10 1500 950 1 Sheet parameters data:

Page 289: USRGUIDE

User Guide

289

0 Border style - possible values: 0 = standard , 1 = ANSI.

6 Sheet style - used by version 1.0:

0 = A4 5 = A

1 = A3 6 = B

2 = A2 7 = C

3 = A1 8 = D

4 = A0 9 = E

0 Workspace orientation - possible values:0 = landscape, 1 = portrait

1 1 = show border, 0 = hide border.

1 1 = show title block, 0 = hide title block.

0 Sheet border/title/text color.

15269887 Sheet area color (RGB value in longinteger form, converted from Hex format:

$00,00,00,00 = black,

$00,FF,FF,FF = white

1 1 = snap grid on, 0 = snap grid off.

10 Snap grid size.

1 1 = visible grid on, 0 = grid off.

10 Visible grid size.

1500 X custom size - used by version. 1.0.

950 Y custom size -used by version 1.0.

1 1 = use custom size, 0 = use predefinedsize - used by version 1.0 Schematic.

Part 90 80 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 'PALG' 'DIP8'Each instance of a part in the sheet isrecorded here, along with all fields thatdescribe the instance:

Part Marks part object;

90 X location.

80 Y location

0 Display mode:

0 = normal,

1 = DeMorgan,

Page 290: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

290

2 = IEEE

0 1 = mirrored, 0 = not mirrored.

0 Orientation - Possible values: 0 = 0degree, 1 = 90 degrees, 2 = 180 degrees,3 = 270 degrees.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

1 Part ID (refers to number of part incomponent, referenced by component ID.

0 Library Component Id (refers to number ofitem in Library component list definedabove).

0 1 = show Hidden fields, 0 = hide Hiddenfields.

0 1 = show Hidden pins, 0 = hide HiddenPins.

'PALG' Library Reference.

'DIP8'Footprint.

Designator 90 80 0 8388 1 0 0 'U1'Part designator object, includes text andgraphical elements:

Designator Object identifier.

90 X location.

80 Y location.

0 Orientation - possible values:

0 = 0 degree

1 = 90 degreess

2 = 180 degrees

3 = 270 degrees

8388 Color.

1 Font ID, refers to font ID in Font Table atbeginning of file.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected

0 1 = hidden, 0 = not hidden.

'U1'Text string for designator.

PartType 90 750 0 8388 1 0 0 'PALG'Part type text object.

PartType Object identifier.

90 X location.

Page 291: USRGUIDE

User Guide

291

750 Y location.

0 Orientation - Possible values: 0 = 0degree, 1 = 90 degrees, 2 = 180 degrees,3 = 270 degrees.

8388 Color.

1 Font ID.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

0 1 = hidden, 0 = not hidden.

'PALG'Text.

PartDescription 90 74 0 8388 1 0 1 'Part Field1'

Part text field 1 (Part text fields 1-8 anddefined in this section; part text fields 9-16 are defined in version 2.0 section,below):

PartDescription Object identifier.

90 X location.

74 Y location.

0 Orientation - possible values:

0 = 0 degree

1 = 90 degreess

2 = 180 degrees

3 = 270 degrees

8388 Color.

1 Font ID.

01 = selected, 0 = unselected.

11 = hidden, 0 = not hidden.

'Part Field1'Text for this field.

SheetPartFileName 90 80 0 128 1 0 1 'SheetPath'

Part sheet path text object:

SheetPartFileName Object identifier.

90 X location.

80 Y location.

0 Orientation - Possible values: 0 = 0degree, 1 = 90 degrees, 2 = 180 degrees,3 = 270 degrees.

Page 292: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

292

128 Color.

1 Font ID.

01 = selected, 0 = unselected.

11 = hidden, 0 = not hidden.

'SheetPath'Text for this field.

Wire 1 8388608 0 2 60 680 290 680 Wire object placed in sheet:

Wire Object identifier.

1 Width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

8388608 Color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

2 Number of vertices (max: 50).

60 X vertex 1.

680 y Vertex 1.

290 x Vertex 2.

680 y Vertex 2.

Bus 1 8388608 0 2 60 600 290 600 Bus object placed in sheet:

Bus Object identifier.

1 Width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

8388608 Color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

2 Number of vertices (max: 50).

60 X vertex 1.

600 Y vertex 1.

290 X vertex 2.

Page 293: USRGUIDE

User Guide

293

600 Y vertex 2.

BusEntry 90 500 100 510 1 8388608 0 Bus entry object placed in sheet:

BusEntry Object identifier.

90 X location 1.

500 Y location 1.

100 X location 2.

510 Y location 2.

1 Width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

8388608 Color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

NetLabel 80 450 0 128 1 0 'Text' Net label object placed in sheet:

NetLabel Object identifier.

80 X location.

450 Y location.

0 Orientation - Possible values: 0 = 0degree, 1 = 90 degrees, 2 = 180 degrees,3 = 270 degrees.

128 Color.

1 Font ID.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

'Text' Text content of field.

PowerObject 2 80 400 0 128 0 'VCC' Power port object placed in sheet:

PowerObject Object identifier.

2 Style - possible values:

0 = circle 4 = gnd

1 = arrow 5 = gnd Signal

2 = bar 6 = gnd Earth

3 = wave

80 X location.

Page 294: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

294

400 Y location.

0 Orientation - Possible values: 0 = 0degree, 1 = 90 degrees, 2 = 180 degrees,3 = 270 degrees.

128 Color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

'VCC' Text.

SheetSymbol 90 350 90 70 0 128 8454 0 1Net label text object placed in sheet.

SheetSymbol Object identifier.

90 X location.

350 Y location.

90 X size.

70 X size.

0 Border width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

128 Border color.

8454 Fill color.

01 = selected, 0 = unselected.

11 = solid, 0 = not solid.

SheetFileName 90 350 0 8388 1 0 0 'File Name'

SheetFileName text object:

SheetFileName Object identifier.

90 X location.

350 Y location.

0 Orientation - Possible values: 0 = 0degree, 1 = 90 degrees, 2 = 180 degrees,3 = 270 degrees.

8388 Color.

1 Font ID.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

01 = hidden, 0 = not hidden.

Page 295: USRGUIDE

User Guide

295

'File Name'Text.

SheetName 90 360 0 8388 1 0 0 'Name'Sheet name text object placed in sheet:

SheetName Object identifier.

90 X location.

360 Y location.

0 Orientation - Possible values: 0 = 0degree, 1 = 90 degrees, 2 = 180 degrees,3 = 270 degrees.

8388608 Color.

1 Font ID.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

01 = hidden, 0 = not hidden.

'Name' Text.

SheetNet 0 3 0 6 128 8454 128 0 '0'Sheet entry object (each sheet entry isdescribed within its sheet symbolsection):

SheetNet Object identifier.

0 Input/output Type - possible values:

0 = unspecified

1 = output

2 = input

3 = bidirectional

3 Arrow style - possible values:

0 = none

1 = left

2 = right

3 = left/Right

0 Position - possible values:

0 = left

1 = bottom

2 = right

3 = top

6 Distance from top.

128 Border color.

Page 296: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

296

8454 Fill color.

128 Text color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

'0'Text.

EndSheetSymbol End of Sheet symbol description.

Port 3 0 1 90 80 40 60 8454 128 0 'Port'Port object description:

Port Object identifier.

3 Arrow style - possible values:

0 = none

1 = left

2 = right

3 = left/Right

0 Input/output type - possible values:

0 = unspecified

1 = output

2 = input

3 = bidirectional

1 Text alignment - possible values:

0 = center

1 = left

2 = right

90 Width.

80 X location.

40 Y location.

60 Color.

8454 Fill color.

128 Text color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected

'Port'Text.

Junction 90 190 0 128 0 Junction object description:

Junction Object identifier.

90 X location.

Page 297: USRGUIDE

User Guide

297

190 Y location.

0 Size - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

128 Color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

SimProbe 90 170 255 0 '' Probe object for simulation:

SimProbe Object identifier.

90 X location.

170 Y location.

255 Color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

'' Text.

SimStimulus 100 150 255 0 '' Stimulus object for simulation:

SimStimulus Object identifier.

100 X location.

150 Y location.

255 Color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

'' Text.

NoERC 90 130 255 0 No ERC object in sheet:

NoERC Object identifier.

90 X location.

130 Y location.

255 Color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

LayoutDirective 10 50 2 2 0 90 100 255 0

PCB Layout object in sheet:

LayoutDirective Object identifier.

10 Track width.

Page 298: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

298

50 Via width.

2 Net topology.

0 = X Bias 4 = min daisychain

1 = Y Bias 5 = start enddaisy

2 = shortest 6 = start starpoint

3 = daisy chain

2 Routing priority:

0 = highest

1 = high

2 = medium

3 = low

4 = lowest

0 Layer - possible values:

0 = No layer 17 = Top Overlay

1 = Top layer 18 = Bottom Overlay

2 = Mid layer 1 19 = Top Paste

3 = Mid layer 2 20 = Bottom Paste

4 = Mid layer 3 21 = Top Solder

5 = Mid layer 4 22 = Bottom Solder

6 = Mid layer 5 23 = Internal Plane 1

7 = Mid layer 6 24 = Internal Plane 2

8 = Mid layer 7 25 = Internal Plane 3

9 = Mid layer 8 26 = Internal Plane 4

10 = Mid layer 9 27 = Drill Guide

11 = Mid layer 10 28 = Keepout layer

12 = Mid layer 11 29 = Mechanical 1

13 = Mid layer 12 30 = Mechanical 2

14 = Mid layer 13 31 = Mechanical 3

15 = Mid layer 14 32 = Mechanical 4

16 = Bottom layer 33 = Multi-layer

90 X location.

Page 299: USRGUIDE

User Guide

299

100 Y location.

255Color.

01 = selected, 0 = unselected.

Polygon 0 167 26 1 0 3 40 70 50 30 10 90Graphical polygon in sheet:

Polygon Object identifier.

0 Line width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

167 Border color.

26 Fill color.

1 1 = solid, 0 = not solid.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

3 Number of vertices.

40 X vertex 1.

70 Y vertex 1.

50 X vertex 2.

30 Y vertex 2.

10X vertex 3.

90Y vertex 3.

Polyline 1 0 16711 0 2 390 810 500 820Graphical polygon in sheet:

Polyline Object identifier.

1 Line width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

0 Line style - possible values:

0 = solid

1 = dashed

2 = dotted

Page 300: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

300

16711 Color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

2 Number of vertices.

390 X vertex 1.

810 Y vertex 1.

500 X vertex 2.

820Y vertex 2.

EllipticalArc 40 60 22 20 1 0.000 0.000 248 0

Graphical elliptical arc in sheet:

EllipticalArc Object identifier.

40 X location.

60 Y location.

22 X radius.

0 Y radius.

1 Line width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

0.000 Start angle.

0.000End angle.

248Color.

01 = selected, 0 = unselected.

Bezier 1 255 0 4 390 500 470 530 490 490 470 420

Graphical bezier curve in sheet:

Bezier Object identifier.

1 Line width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

255 Color.

Page 301: USRGUIDE

User Guide

301

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected

4 Number of vertices.

390 X vertex 1.

500 Y vertex 1.

470 X vertex 2.

530 Y vertex 2.

490 X vertex 3.

490Y vertex 3.

470X vertex 4.

420Y vertex 4.

Label 400 380 0 8388608 2 0 'Text' Annotation (short text string) object insheet:

Label Object identifier.

400 X location.

380 Y location.

0 Orientation - Possible values: 0 = 0degree, 1 = 90 degrees, 2 = 180 degrees,3 = 270 degrees.

8388608 Color.

2 Font ID.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

'Text' Text (0-255 characters).

TextFrame 0 0 470 280 0 0 248 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0

Text frame in sheet:

TextFrame Object identifier.

0 X start location (reference point).

0 Y start location (reference point).

470 X ending corner.

280 Y ending Corner.

0 Border width - possible values:.

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

Page 302: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

302

0 Border color.

248 Fill color.

0 Text color.

1 Font ID.

0 1 = solid, 0 = not solid.

01 = show border, 0 = hide border.

1Alignment - possible values:

0 = center

1 = left

2 = right

11 = word wrap, 0 = no word wrap.

11 = clip to bounding Rectangle, 0 = noclipping.

01 = selected, 0 = unselected.

Begin Delimits beginning of text.

Text Text, up to 32K characters, includingspaces.

( ) This line contains a null terminatingcharacter (not visible in most editors).

End End of text marker.

Rectangle 380 270 450 240 0 167 126 0 1

Graphic rectangle object:

Rectangle Object identifier.

380 X location.

270 Y location.

450 X corner.

240 Y corner.

0 Border width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

167 Border color.

126 Fill color.

Page 303: USRGUIDE

User Guide

303

01 = selected, 0 = unselected.

11 = solid, 0 = not solid.

RoundRectangle 0 0 440 170 20 20 0 167 126 0 1

Graphic rounded rectangle object:

RoundRectangle Object identifier.

0 X location.

0 Y location.

440 X corner.

170 Y corner.

20 Corner X radius

20 Corner Y radius

0 Border width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

167Border color.

126Fill color.

01 = selected, 0 = unselected.

11 = solid, 0 = not solid.

Ellipse 400 120 50 22 0 167 126 1 0

Graphical ellipse object:

Ellipse Object identifier.

400 X location.

120 Y location.

50 X radius.

22 Y radius.

0 Line width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

Page 304: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

304

167 Line color.

126 Fill color.

1 1 = solid, 0 = not solid.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

Pie 410 60 20 0 18.435 68.435 167 126 1 0

Filled arc object:

Pie Object identifier.

410 X location.

60 Y location.

20 Radius.

0 Line width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

3 = large

18.435 Start angle.

68.435 End angle.

167 Border color.

126Fill color.

11 = solid, 0 = not solid.

01 = selected, 0 = unselected.

Image 520 160 600 250 0 0 0 0 1 'C:\ROW.WMF'

Linked image file object:

Image Object identifier.

520 X location.

160 Y location.

600 X corner.

250 Y corner.

0 Line width - possible values:

0 = smallest

1 = small

2 = medium

Page 305: USRGUIDE

User Guide

305

3 = large

0 Border color.

0 1 = selected, 0 = unselected.

0 1 = solid, 0 = not solid.

1 1 = keep aspect ratio, 0 = don't keepaspect ratio.

'C:\ROW.WMF'Image File Name (single quote is delimiterfor beginning/end of string).

EndSheet End sheet version 1.2.

Version 2.0 Sheet Sheet addendum for version 2.0.

Part 11599871 128 0 0 0 Addendum for each instance of a part,includes fields not support in version 1.2format.

Part Object identifier.

11599871 Fill color.

128 Border color.

0 Pin color.

0 1 = override library colors, 0 = use Librarycolors.

0 1 = display Field names, Hide Fieldnames.

PartDescription 90 660 0 8388608 1 0 1 'Part Field9'

Part fields 9-16 follow the same format aspart fields 1-8 described above.

Library Version 2.0 Library addendum for version 2.0

1 Number of components in the Library

Component Object identifier.

PAL16P8A Component Name field.

Part Field 1 Part field 1 name label (custom name forfield displayed in sheets).

Blank field is empty (no custom name).

EndComponent End component - continues in this formatto Part Field 16.

EndLibrary End of Library addendum for version 1.5:

1 4 4 20 0

1 Sheet style ID.

Page 306: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

306

4 number of regions in X reference (this isthe number of sheet border divisions) .

4 number of regions in Y reference.

20 sheet margin width.

0 1 = reference zone (sheet margins) on, 0= reference zone off.

EndSheet End of sheet addendum for version 2.0.

Page 307: USRGUIDE

User Guide

307

Schematic Library Editor ascii file formatThe .ASC format output of the Schematic Library Editorapplication is very similar to the text output for AdvancedSchematic sheet files, as many of the same data object types(e.g. graphical lines, etc.) are common to both applications.The primary difference is that the library stores componentdescriptions with all Library-level edited fields. Somesheet-level fields are “inherited” from the .ASC sheetformat and included, but ignored when the library editorreads-in the text version format.

Protel for Windows - Schematic Library Editor Ascii File Version 1.2

File header.

69 Measure of the logical size of the file (perthe number of objects and nested objectsin the file).

Organization This line is ignored. (uses code borrowedfrom sheet format).

Project Library C:\FORMAT1.LIB Created 2-Sep-1993

Library description (string to 255characters).Seven following blank lines are ignored:

0 0 This line is ignored.

End This line is ignored.

[Font_Table] Font table header

1 Number of entries in the font table

12 0 0 0 0 0 MS Sans Serif Font entry

12 Font size

0 Orientation - possible values : 0, 90, 180,270 degrees.

0 1 = underline, 0 = no underline

0 1 = italic , 0 = no italic

0 1 = bold , 0 = no bold

0 1 = strikeout, 0 = no strikeout

MS Sans Serif Font name.

Page 308: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

308

EndFont End font table marker.

Library

0 6 0 1 0 0 15269 1 10 1 10 1150 760 0 0 Library workspace fields:

0 Border style (always 0, field is inheritedfrom sheet format).

6 Sheet style - only used by version 1.0Schematic).

0 Workspace orientation - possible values:0 = landscape, 1 = portrait.

1 1 = show border, 0 = hide border.

0 1 = show title block, 0 = hide title block.

0 Sheet border, title, text color (long integerform of hex string, see sheet formatdescription, above).

15269 Sheet area color (long integer form of hexstring, see sheet format description,above).

1 1 = snap grid on, 0 = snap grid off

10 Snap grid size

1 1 = visible grid on, 0 = visible grid off

10 Visible grid size

1150 X custom size - used by version 1.0Library Editor

76 Y custom size - used by version 1.0Library Editor

0 1 = use custom size, 0 = use pre-definedsize - used by version 1.0 Library Editor

0 1 = show hidden pins, 0 = hide hiddenpins.

2 Number of component in the library

Component Component header.

1 Number of parts in the component.

2 Number of logical components that sharethe same schematic.

[Library Name] Marks component description field:

Description Description field text.

FOOT PRINT1 Component footprint field 1.

Page 309: USRGUIDE

User Guide

309

FOOT PRINT2 Component footprint field 2.

FOOT PRINT3 Component footprint field 3.

FOOT PRINT4 Component footprint field 4.

Library Part Field 1 Library Part field 1.

Library Part Field 2 Library Part field 2, repeats for each field,to Part field 8.

U? Default designator

Sheet Part File Name Sheet Part filename

PAL16P8A List of all the logical components thatshare the same schematic.

PAL16L8D

Part Library Part header

0 0 Part X and Y size (minimum-to-maximumcoordinates)

0 X size

0 Y size

Rectangle 0 110 60 0 0 128 11599 0 1 Rectangle graphic object (same as sheetentity, see above).

Pin 0 0 0 0 1 1 30 0 -10 2 0 'I1' '1' Pin object:

Pin Object identifier.

0 1 = dot type, 0 = not dot

0 1 = clock type, 0 = not clock

0 Electrical attributes:

0 = input 4 = passive

1 = IO 5 = HiZ

2 = output 6 = openEmitter

3 = open Collector 7 =power

0 1 = hidden, 0 = not hidden

1 1 = show pin name, 0 = hide pin name

1 1 = show pin number, 0 = hide pin number

30 Pin length

0 X location

10 Y location

Page 310: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

310

2 Orientation - Possible values : 0 = 0degree, 1 = 90 degrees, 2 = 180 degrees,3 = 270 degrees.

0 Pin color

'I1' Pin name

'1' Pin number

Pin 0 0 0 0 1 1 30 0 -20 2 0 'I2' '2' Next pin entry (continues until end ofcomponent pins.

EndNormalPart End-marker for normal part representation.

EndDeMorganPart End-marker for DeMorgan partrepresentation.

EndIEEEPart End-marker for IEEE part representation.

EndComponent End component description.

EndLibrary End Library version 1.0

Library Version 2.0 Library addendum for version 2.0

Component Object identifier.

PAL16P8A Component name field.

Part Field 1 Part field 1 label - when present,supersedes data in version 1 section,above.

Part Field 2 Part field 2 label. etc. through Part field16.

EndComponent End component marker.

EndLibrary End of Library addendum for version 2.0marker.

(End of .ASC library file format)

Page 311: USRGUIDE

User Guide

311

Glossary

absolute origin The absolute workspace origin (0,0 coordinates) or lower-left corner of the workspace.

active document In the Windows environment, the Active Document isdistinguished by its title bar being colored in the activecolor (default is blue) with inactive documents having theirtitle bars colored in the inactive color (default is gray).

active Document Editor The active Document Editor is distinguished by its EDAEditor Tab being on the top and filled in gray. Documentsof the active document editor type can now be edited.

Advanced PCB Server which allows you to design printed circuit boardsand generate output files from which phototools can becreated.

Advanced Schematic Server which allows you to create and edit schematic sheetsand the components used in those schematics.

annotation Component reference designators (or labels) that appear onthe schematic sheet, in netlists or on a printed circuit board.

ANSI Refers to an international standard for technical drafting.See also ISO.

any angle Non-orthogonal drawing mode where (non-electrical) linesor wires that can be placed at angles other than 45 or 90degrees.

application A program (Windows terminology).

arc Circular or semi-circular graphical design elements.

array Multiple instances of a single item, placed using the PlaceArray command.

Page 312: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

312

ascend To move from a child sheet, back to its parent sheet in ahierarchical design.

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange.Standard seven bit code for representing alphanumeric dataand computer instructions.

attributes The characteristics of an item that can be edited, orchanged. For example wire attributes include width andcolor.

automatic startup Start up state of a server where it is automatically startedwhen EDA Client is started.

back annotate Updating schematic information from changes made to theprinted circuit board layout.

backup library A special library that includes component records for eachpart placed in a schematic sheet. This library is attached tothe sheet file when the sheet is saved. The backup libraryallows the user to supply sheets to other AdvancedSchematic users, without having to supply completelibraries.

beep Sound used by the computer to signal or prompt the user forsome action.

bezier curve Complex graphical curves, placed as precision arcs, definedby a series of control point handles.

Bill of Materials Or, BOM. A list of the components (including quantities)used in a design.

body See outline.

border Graphical device outlining the edge of the sheet workspace,normally including coordinate references for the sheet.

break Conversion of a single wire segment into two (movable)connected segments.

browse Visual scanning of library items from the AdvancedSchematic workspace.

Page 313: USRGUIDE

User Guide

313

bus A special wire type that symbolically represents acollection of individual nets.

button Graphical icon used to perform process launching.

button editor Allows you to change the process launched by a button andassign the bitmap of a button.

cache A temporary record of each component used in all currentlyopen sheets. This cache is used to create a backup librarywhich is attached to each sheet file. See also, backuplibrary.

child A sub-sheet descended from another (parent) sheet in ahierarchical design.

clear To remove a selection permanently from the workspace.Same effect as Delete. See also Cut, Copy.

Client Short for EDA Client. An application which runs underWindows, providing the user interface and network supportfor EDA servers.

Client Basic Programming language in which macro scripts can bewritten to run in the EDA Client Server environment.

Client Menu Menu through which you control EDA Client. This is whereyou install, remove and configure servers, customize andedit resources, setup user preferences and save and openconfiguration files.

Client Pascal Programming language in which macro scripts can bewritten in the EDA Client Server environment.

Client Station A Personal Computer (PC) running EDA Client.

Client Status Bar The Client Status Bar is the two line bar across the bottom(or top) of the screen. It includes the status bar and thecommand status bar. The status bar is dynamic, it providesinformation about the cursor position in the workspace andthe current state of the process being executed. Thecommand status bar reports the current process beingexecuted and gives a description of that process.

Page 314: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

314

clipboard Reserved memory used to hold Cut or Copy commandselections.

clock Pin type that symbolically represents clock function,represented by a small triangular shape at the pin base.

collapsing branch Collapsing a branch will cause all documents below theactive document to be hidden, their presence beingindicated by a small + in the active document’s icon.

command The term previously used to describe any process that isperformed by choosing a menu item, e.g., Place Componentor File-Save. A menu item is know known as a ProcessLauncher, which is used to launch a Process.

comment Optional component text field created when a component isplaced. Normally used to hold a component value ordescription.

complex hierarchy Schematic hierarchy where a particular sheet is used morethan once in a project. In complex projects, a child sheet isreferenced multiple times from another sheet (or sheets).See also hierarchy.

complex sheet A special sheet icon that represents duplicate instances of asub-sheet in the Project Manager display. The complexsheet icon indicates that a sheet symbol points to a sub-sheet that is also being pointed to by another sheet symbol.Clicking on any complex sheet icon will place its “owner”sheet in-focus. See also hierarchy, master sheet, sub-sheet.

component The specific schematic library package that representseither a manufacturer’s catalog listing or a generic type. ASchematic Library Editor component will be made up ofone or more parts. See also part.

component field Any of 16 different fields that hold component text, as wellas the component designator (or label), componentdescription and eight optional read-only library fields thatcan hold other references. All of these fields can hold up to255 alphanumeric characters.

Page 315: USRGUIDE

User Guide

315

component text Text that can be displayed with a schematic part or PCBcomponent. Component text is created at the time thecomponent is placed. It can be moved (including rotate andflip) but cannot be deleted (only hidden). This text remainsassociated with the component until the component isdeleted.

configure server Add and remove resources to the chosen Document Editor,from the pool currently available in EDA Client. You canalso alter the start up state of the server, get information onthe .INS and .DLL files it uses and a list of all the processesthe server provides. From the Configure Server dialog boxyou can then customize them if you wish.

connection The logical or physical link between any two netlist nodes.Logical connections are indicated by the Advanced PCBratsnest display. Physical connection are completed routes.Advanced PCB allows connections to be partially logicaland physical, e.g., partially routed.

connectivity The logical relationship of components and wires.Connectivity simulates the electrical connections within aschematic and is used to maintain connections ascomponents or wires are moved on the sheet.

control point The special graphical handles used to define a bezier curve.See also handle, focus.

copy To add a selection to the clipboard without removing itfrom the workspace. See also Clear, Cut.

cursor The graphic “pointer” or selection tool used to select orposition objects in the workspace.

customize server Customize the resources for the active Document Editor.Customization includes; selecting another resource fromthe list of resources available to this Document Editor(perhaps choosing your own specialized menu), editing aselected resource and toggling the display state of toolbars.

cut To clear a selection from the workspace and copy it to theclipboard. See also Clear, Copy.

Page 316: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

316

de-select Releasing the selected condition of an item (or group) in thedocument window.

default Program settings or options that remain activated untilchanged by the user.

descend To move from a schematic sheet, to a child sheet,represented by a sheet symbol, in a hierarchical design.

design rules Connectivity-based features for checking electrical andlogical conformity to user-defined (and system default)rules.

designator Also called component label. The unique identifier assignedto each component in a circuit.

device See part.

directive A special symbol used to attach PCB layout information toa specific net, such as routing priority, track width, etc.

discrete Generic component types such as transistors, capacitors,etc.

document Another name for a user-generated or auxiliary file.

documentation Information that explains how to use the software. It can beprovided in an electronic format and a physical format.

dot Pin type that symbolically indicates inversion, representedby a small circular shape at the pin base.

double-sided Refers to a PCB with wires on both sides of a singlelaminate layer.

drag Move (object) along with its connected items. Also: mouseoperation performed with LEFT MOUSE button depressed, aswhen selecting a range of text.

draft mode The display, plotting or printing of primitives (wires, pins,arcs, fills, etc.) in outline, rather than filled, form.

Page 317: USRGUIDE

User Guide

317

EDA An acronym for Electronic Design Automation. EDA isused as a label for software tools used for productdevelopment in the electronics industry.

EDA Client ™ An application which runs under Windows, providing theuser interface and network support for EDA servers.

EDA document The design or database produced by an EDA DocumentEditor.

EDA Document Editor The Document Editor is where the user performs the actualediting; typing in text, placing wires, moving tracks and soon. Each server will contain none, one or more documenteditors. An example is the Advanced Schematic Server,which has two document editors, the Schematic DocumentEditor and the Schematic Library Document Editor.Another example is the Netlist Server which has nodocument editor, the Text Expert Document Editor beingused to display its results.

EDA document type Each Document editor will produce a different documenttype. While the file extension gives an indication of thedocument type, for example - .PCB, .NET., these are notfixed.

EDA document window The document window is the window frame throughwhich you view your document. It includes the title barwith the maximize and minimize buttons and the windowframe with the scroll bars (if required).

EDA Editor Short for EDA Document Editor.

EDA editor tabs Tabs located along one edge of EDA Client, used to switchbetween Document Editors.

EDA Editor Panel The EDA Editor Panel appears down the left of the screen.A Document Editor may have a panel to provide easyaccess to some of the features available in that editor. Forexample, the Schematic Document Editor has a panel whichallows you to add and remove libraries, select componentsfrom the active library and also browse through objectsplaced in the document.

Page 318: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

318

EDA Server EDA Servers provide the ‘services’ in the EDA Client /Server environment. These servers may include texteditors, schematic editors, simulation editors, PCB editors,autorouters and so on.

Edit Menu Menu through which you can perform editing functions onthe document such as; cutting, pasting, placing, moving,changing, etc.

electrical rules Connectivity-based features that check for shorts, un-driven inputs, unconnected wires and similar electricaldesign violations. See also design rules.

exception handling Process followed when the executable code encounters aninvalid condition. These conditions are trapped, allowingfor graceful recovery. If there is an error condition whichcauses the application to close, the exception handler willattempt to restore data when the application is re-started.

expanding branch Expanding a branch will cause all documents below theactive document to be displayed in the Project Manager.

File Menu Menu through which you can perform file relatedoperations such as creating, opening, saving and closingfiles.

fill Color or pattern assignment for the inside of graphicalitems: rectangle, arcs or polygons and electrical items:parts, ports, sheet entries and sheet symbols.

flat design A non-hierarchical multi-sheet schematic where Ports and /or Net Labels are used to indicate connections to othersheets.

focus Refers to the current active individual object displayed inthe workspace. Only one item can be the current focus.When an item is the focus, it displays its graphical editinghandles. The object in focus can be moved, dragged (withconnections), deleted or re-sized (if applicable). To placean object in focus, place the cursor over the object and clickLEFT MOUSE. See also selection, handle.

Page 319: USRGUIDE

User Guide

319

footprint The schematic component attribute that defines which PCBcomponent is to be used, e.g. DIP14, AXIAL0.4 etc. Whenthe netlist is loaded into the PCB design package, thisattribute is used to determine which PCB library componentto load.

forward annotate Updating a printed circuit board layout with changes madeto the schematic.

global Refers to a process or condition that applies to all sheetswithin a multi-sheet project. In relation to the use of netidentifiers (net labels, ports, sheet entries), refers to thoseidentifiers whose scope includes an entire project. See alsolocal.

global change Any change that can be assigned to like attributes of otherprimitives of the same type. For example, you can changethe size of all free text, or limit the change to selected texton a single sheet.

grid A system of visible and invisible points on the workspaceused to locate a precise coordinate position.

group Refers to one or more library component names associatedwith the same component description. Library entries canhave any number of component names that share the samespecification and graphical description.

handle Small squares, displayed on an object that is the currentfocus, which can be dragged to re-define the shape of theobject. Bezier curves have special handles, called controlpoints, which are used to define the curves shape. See alsofocus.

hardware arc When plotting, arcs which are created by the plotter, fromcoordinate, line width and radius information. Someplotters support this option, others depend upon softwarearc descriptions generated by Advanced PCB.

Help Menu Menu through which you can open the on-line help files.

Page 320: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

320

hidden pin Component power-type pin that is normally hidden whenthe component is displayed. Because power nets aregenerally global (they apply to all sheets in a project) it isvery convenient to have these pins hidden. Hidden pins arealways assumed to be connected to power nets of the samename and are automatically included netlists. Whendisplayed, hidden pins are not deemed connected to nets ofthe same name.

hierarchy The concept of hierarchy applies generally to any multi-sheet schematic. Sheet Symbols are placed within one sheetto represent another sheet (or sub-sheet).

highlight A special display state that outlines items as an aid toidentification or editing. For example, when placing ormoving wires, they are displayed in a highlighted condition.See also selection.

hot spot Special cursor shape that is displayed when an electricalconnection is possible at the current coordinate. Thisfeature is available when the Electrical Grid option isenabled (Options-Preferences command). The cursor willjump to nearby electrical hot spots when placing electricalobjects (wires, buses, parts, net labels, ports, etc.).

HP-EEsof Interface Server which creates an EEsof Libra or EEsof Touchstoneformat netlist.

IEEE International ANSI/IEEE Standard 9-984 for graphicalrepresentation of circuits. The IEEE format allows thedesigner to include much of the component data bookinformation within the component symbol.

IGES Initial Graphics Exchange Specification. A general usestandard for exchanging graphical information betweenplatforms or applications.

inter-sheet connection In multi-sheet flat designs, these are connections thatrepresent a net that crosses from one sheet to another.Advanced Schematic provides two ways to linking thesesheets: by using ports, which can either connect to ports orsheet entries with the same name, or by using global net

Page 321: USRGUIDE

User Guide

321

labels, where all nets of the same name are associatedacross multiple sheets. The method that will be used to linkbetween sheets is established by the net identifier scope.

ISO International Standards Organization. See also metric.

junction Special symbol, used to electrically (logically) connect twowires.

keyboard mapping Mapping of keystroke(s) to process launchers.

keyboard shortcut Key stroke(s) used to perform process launching.

Keyboard Shortcut Editor

Allows you to map key stroke(s) to processes.

keyboard shortcut list List of shortcut key assignments.

label See designator.

language list List of languages currently available. Each language has itsown syntax. The syntax of these languages can be editedand new languages can be defined.

library Collection of components or devices, stored in anAdvanced Schematic library format.

Library Editor Document Editor used for managing Advanced Schematic(and OrCAD SDT 3/4) component libraries.

line Any line that is non-electrical in the drawing. Electricallines are referred to as wires and have special properties inAdvanced Schematic.

link The process of listing all associated sheets for a design.

local Refers to a process or condition that is confined to a singlesheet. In relation to net identifiers, refers to net labelswhose scope is limited to a single sheet. See also global.

Local Area Network A network whose domain is local, typically within an officeor building.

Page 322: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

322

Macro Execution of a sequence of jobs. May include otherprocesses.

Macro Server Sever which interprets Macro script documents.

Macro Script Set of instructions and parameters written in a Macro ScriptLanguage.

master sheet The “topmost” sheet in a multi-sheet design project. Inhierarchical designs, the master sheet includes sheetsymbols for the next layer of hierarchy and may or may notinclude circuitry. In multi-sheet flat designs, the mastersheet only contains sheet symbols for all the sub-sheets. Inboth types of design, the master sheet is used to open theentire project.

Memory Monitor Monitors the availability of free memory and free resourcesin the Windows environment. When either falls below apreset level a Memory Monitor Warning pops up. Thepreset levels are user definable.

menu List of menu items.

Menu Editor Allows you to define menus and menu items and map themto process launchers.

menu item A label that appears in a menu, which when chosen willeither launch a process or display a sub-menu.

merge To move components from one library to another.

Microsoft Email Electronic mail that is handled by the Microsoft Emailsoftware.

minimum X, Y The minimum X or Y coordinate of items in the AdvancedPCB workspace. This describes the left-most and bottom-most coordinates used in the file or plot.

module port See port.

multi Multi-device component. Schematic component whosegates can be represented by individual logic symbols.

Page 323: USRGUIDE

User Guide

323

navigate The method of moving through the various levels of ahierarchical design. This is done graphically in AdvancedSchematic by either clicking on a sheet in the ProjectManager, via the large up and down arrows on the maintoolbar or by selecting the Tools-Up Hierarchy or ToolsDown Hierarchy menu items.

net Connects all points that are electrically connected in aschematic.

net identifier Used to uniquely identify a net. Possible net identifiersinclude; net labels, ports, power ports, sheet entries andhidden pin names.

net identifier scope Scope of inter-sheet connectivity to be applied to a multi-sheet design when the netlist is created. There are threeoptions; Net Labels and Ports Global, which is used for flatdesigns; Ports Only Global, which is also used for flatdesigns (net labels are local to each sheet); Sheet SymbolPort Connections, which is used for hierarchical designs.The first two options create connections directly betweensub-sheets (horizontal connectivity), the last option createsconnections between a port on a sub-sheet and the matchingsheet entry in the sheet symbol that represents the sub-sheet(vertical connectivity).

net label Special text symbol used to associate a wire with a specificnet.

netlist A text file that lists all the components and theirconnectivity in an electronic circuit. Netlists are used totransfer design information between EDA tools.

Netlist Server Server which creates a netlist in the chosen format.

object Any individual item that can be placed in the AdvancedSchematic workspace, e.g., wires, lines, buses, junctions,components, etc.

Object Client

Page 324: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

324

On-Demand Start up state of server where it is available for use but notloaded into memory.

On-Line Help User documentation in the Hypertext On-Line Help format.

On-Line Manual User documentation which appears in the same format as abook, except that it is accessible on-line.

orthogonal Drawing mode, where wires and lines are constrained toeither vertical, horizontal or 45 degree placement. See alsoany angle.

outline The symbolic shape used to describe individualcomponents or devices.

package The physical description, or “footprint” of a component,e.g., DIP6, defined by the number and location of pins,dimensions, etc.

pan The ability to move the viewing area of the screen as youwork on a magnified area of the document window. TheProtel Design System provides automatic panningwhenever the cursor includes a crosshair, such as placing ormoving selected items.

parent Any sheet that includes sheet symbols for another sub-sheet(child) in a hierarchical design.

Parent - Child Relationship

A child document is related to its parent via an identifierlocated on the parent document. This identifier will beeither a Sheet Symbol or a Process Container. The parent -child relationship is shown in the Project Manager.

part field See component field.

part A special object constructed in the Schematic LibraryEditor. It usually represents a generic component, such as aresistor or capacitor or one part of a multi-part component.In the Schematic Library Editor it is built up as a collectionof graphical objects: lines, arcs, etc.; text fields and one ormore component pins. Once a part is placed in the

Page 325: USRGUIDE

User Guide

325

Schematic Sheet Editor it behaves as a single object. Seealso component.

pin Graphical representation of a component pin on schematiccomponent symbols. Schematic pins are connected usingwires. Pins have only one point with electrical meaning, thehot end. The hot end of a pin is the opposite end from wherethe pin name appears. The hot end should be placed awayfrom the component body when the component is beingcreated.

pipe-link An OrCAD design element, used to list the sub-sheetsassociated with a master sheet in a flat, multi-sheet design.Advanced Schematic sub-sheets are represented by agraphical sheet symbol, placed in the master sheet. See alsoLink.

polygon Multi-sided filled graphical (non-electrical) object.

polyline Lines that can be rendered with multiple joined segmentsand manipulated as an individual entity. Wires, buses andgraphical lines are all polylines in Advanced Schematic.Closed objects like rectangles, round rectangles andpolygons share polyline behavior with un-closed objects.Bezier curves also share polyline behavior.

port A symbol used to indicate a connection to another sheet in aflat design. Ports can indicate an input, output, be bi-directional or be unspecified.

power port Special net identifier used to indicate positive voltage,negative voltage or ground source.

primitive Refers to any individual object, or object primitive. Seeobject.

printed documentation User documentation which is presented in a book or set ofbooks.

process Execution of a sequence of jobs. To perform any operationin EDA Client or in a server, a process must be executed.

Page 326: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

326

All processes can be launched from menu items, tool barbuttons and keyboard short cut keys.

Process Container A Process Container is an object that you place on yourdocument that can provide a service. It is a convenient wayof configuring a service that you need to run repeatedly, forexample Tools-Electrical Rules Check. It contains aprocess launcher and may also contain a report name. Areport produced by a Process Container will appear as achild of the document that contains the Process Container.This relationship can be verified in the Project Manager.Parameters setup in process containers are stored in thedesign file.

Process Identifier Each process is identified by its Process Identifier Anexample of a Process Identifier is Netlist:CreateNetlist.This Process identifier tell us that the Netlist server canexecute a process to create a netlist.

process launcher Instruction to execute a process. Any user initiated actionthat begins a process. Includes: menu items, tool barbuttons, mouse and keyboard shortcuts.

process long summary The process long summary provides a brief descriptionof the process and is used for the tool tip and the status linedescription.

process parameters Each process may require parameters to successfullyexecute. If a process requires parameters, it will prompt forthese through dialog boxes and / or mouse actions. Processparameters can also be passed by process launchers and bymacros.

project All the documents that are associated within a singledesign, irrespective of their hierarchical or flatorganization.

project hierarchy Layered arrangement of documents in a project. Thehierarchy is defined by the parent - child relationshipbetween documents that make up a project. This hierarchycan be of infinite depth, where child documents are parents

Page 327: USRGUIDE

User Guide

327

to other child documents. The hierarchy of a project isshown in the Project Manager.

Project Manager A panel that displays an icon to represent each opendocument and indicates any relationship between them. Ifthe documents are related they will appear in a nestedfashion with a line linking each child document to itsparent. You can select another document to be the activedocument by clicking on it in the Project Manager.

rectangle Four-sided graphical (non electrical) object.

Reference Manual Documentation that details the commands, the messages,the data types and the data primitives used in the software.

Resource Menus, Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcut Lists areresources.

Resource Editor For each of the three sets of resources available in EDAClient (Menus, Keyboard Shortcut Lists and Toolbars) theResource Editor allows you to create, edit and deleteresources. The Resource Editor has access to the entirepool of resources currently available in EDA Client.

Resource File Each server has a Resource (RCS) file. It holds the defaultdefinition of all the resources provided by that server.These include the mapping of each menu item to theprocess identifier of the process it launches, the mapping ofeach toolbar button to its button image file and the processidentifier of the process it launches and the mapping ofshortcut key strokes to the process identifier of the processit launches.

Resource File, Client The resource information for each server that has beenloaded is stored in the CLIENT.RCS file. Customization ofClient or server resources are stored in this file.

Resource File, INI INI files hold the environment defaults, such as open files,window configurations, editor preferences, printer setup,etc.

root sheet See master sheet.

Page 328: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

328

Router The Router handles the flow of information between EDAClient and its servers and between EDA Clients throughoutthe network.

schematic capture CAD package for circuit design capable of generating anetlist or report output allowing the design information tobe transferred to another CAD environment.

selection A method of displaying items that are included in aselection. Items must first be selected in order to begrouped, moved together, cut or copied to the Clipboard,etc. See also focus, highlight.

selection color Color used to display items that are selected. Use theOptions-Schematic Preferences menu item to assign thiscolor.

serial Refers to RS-232C and RS-422 standard for data terminalequipment (DTE) communications.

Server EDA Servers provide the ‘services’ in the EDA Client /Server environment. These servers may include texteditors, schematic editors, simulation editors, PCB editors,autorouters and so on.

Server Description File The server.INS file, also known as the server installationfile. It lists; the server DLL file, the server resource file andthe supported document editors. It also lists each processprovided by the server and their tool tip description / statusline description.

Server Installation Servers are installed by loading their .INS file. Onceinstalled, a server can then be started (unless it isconfigured with a start up state of Automatic) or left in theOn Call state where it will be started the first time you opena document type supported by that server.

sheet An individual schematic file, displayed in its own window.Each schematic sheet, including hierarchical sub-sheets, aresaved as individual files. Advanced Schematic supportssheets from A (A4 metric) to E (A0 metric) size as well ascustom sheet sizes.

Page 329: USRGUIDE

User Guide

329

sheet entry A net identifier that can be placed in a sheet symbol. Usedto create a connection down to a port of the same name onthe sub-sheet the sheet symbol represents.

sheet path field Part text field used when component is to behave as a sheetsymbol rather than a component, that is represent a sub-sheet. This field will contain the name of the sub-sheet thispart represents. When a component is used in this mode thepin names connect to ports of the same name on the sub-sheet. Enabling the Descend Into Sheet Parts option in theNetlist Creation dialog box will then force all parts whichcontain a sub-sheet name in their sheet path field to behavelike sheet symbols. Parts operating in this mode will not beincluded as components in the netlist.

sheet symbol A graphic representation of a schematic sheet that can beplaced on another sheet, indicating hierarchy.

shortcut key Any key that can pop up a menu or launch a process. Manyshortcut keys have default assignments, e.g., PGUP tozoom-in. All shortcut keys are user definable.

signal Any net. Generally used to refer to any non-power net.

simple hierarchy A hierarchy where no child document appears more thanonce. See also hierarchy.

SMD Surface Mount Device. Also SMT (Surface MountTechnology).

snap grid An invisible array of regularly spaced points on the screenthat defines the current cursor position and the availablelocation for any object in the Protel Design Systemworkspace.

snap to Special property of wire placement in Advanced Schematicwhere wires will “attach” to pins when terminated nearthese items. Advanced Schematic also automatically placesjunctions when you terminate one wire at another.

Spice Generic term for a collection of algorithms for simulatinganalog circuits originally developed by the University of

Page 330: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

330

California (Berkeley). Advanced Schematic generates aspecial netlist format that supports a number of Spice-basedsimulators.

Start Server To load a server into memory so that it is ready to run aprocess.

Status bar The window along the bottom of the screen that displays thecursor coordinates and user prompts, such as what useraction is required or the state of the current process.

step-and-repeat See array.

stimuli A special symbol used to indicate the point at which thefunction of a signal (expressed as an algorithm) is appliedto a circuit during simulation.

string Individual element of free or component text.

Stop Server To remove a server from memory, returning it to the On-Demand state. A server that is stopped is still available andwill be automatically re-started when a document requiringthat server is opened.

sub-sheet In multi-sheet schematics, any schematic sheet fileassociated with a master or parent sheet. See alsohierarchical design.

symbols Various graphical and electrical or logical objects placedon the schematic to represent components, devices orblocks of circuits.

syntax Valid arrangement of words, identifiers and expressions fora given language. In Text Expert the valid set of words,identifiers and expressions are; reserved word, symbol,string, number, comment and identifiers.

Syntax Highlighting A technique for document highlighting based on the syntaxof the language, where different words types, symbols andidentifiers are assigned different colors.

template A special graphical entity that holds user-defined sheetsize, border and title block descriptions. Users can create

Page 331: USRGUIDE

User Guide

331

custom sheet templates and apply these templates toschematic sheets at any time, replacing the system’sstandard sheet definitions.

test vector A special symbol used to indicate the point at which a non-algorithmic stream of signal values is applied to a circuitduring simulation.

Text Expert Server which allows you to create and edit text documents.It includes Syntax Highlighting.

text frame A graphical object placed on the schematic sheet that holdsup to 32,000 characters of formatable text. Parts, net labelsand other objects have their own text fields of up to 255characters.

through hole PCB technology where component pins pass through alllayers of the assembled PCB.

title block Area of the schematic sheet reserved for the drawing title,revision information, etc.

tool A process, eg Sch:PlaceWire, that can be invoked byclicking a button on a Tool palette and allows you to placean object in the workspace.

toolbar Set of buttons.

Toolbar Editor Allows you to add and remove buttons and separators froma toolbar and assign process identifiers to buttons.

trace see probe.

User Guide Documentation that explains how to install and use thesoftware and the theory behind it.

vector font In Advanced Schematic, display or printing fonts that aredefined as a sequence of shapes defined by co-ordinates.

vertex The joint of any two straight line segments in polylineobjects: wires, buses, lines and polygons.

Page 332: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

332

View Menu Menu through which you can change the view of the activedocument and also to turn on and off other screen facilitiessuch as status bars, the Project Manager, etc.

visible grid A user-definable grid that provide a visual reference forpositioning items accurately on the schematic sheet.

Wide Area Network A network whose domain goes beyond the bounds of anoffice or building.

wildcard Special Characters * (multiple characters) and ? (singlecharacter) used replace text characters in mask fields orduring text searches.

Windows ® An operating system from Microsoft which allow theconcurrent running of applications, with a graphical userinterface.

Windows Menu Menu through which you can re-arrange and re-order theopen document windows.

wire An electrical (logical) conductor in the schematic drawing,represented by a special line type. Wires are used toconnect pins to other pins, busses or wires and have specialproperties that distinguish them from lines.

worksheet See sheet.

Xilinx Interface Server which creates a Xilinx format hierarchical netlist.

Zoom Menu Menu through which you can change the view of the activedocument.

Page 333: USRGUIDE

User Guide

333

Index

A

absolute originjumping to..........................................................97

access codesSee installing Advanced Schematicadding project sheets..........................................153Advanced PCB

about....................................................................57Advanced Schematic

configuration.....................................................60working in,.........................................................93

Aligning Objects.................................................133all files

saving..................................................................70Annotate command

Paste command and........................................126annotation.............................................................204

back......................................................................57back annotating...............................................204

ANSIsheet border........................................................63title block............................................................64

archivesheet library.......................................................83

arraycreating.............................................................131Item count........................................................132Spacing.............................................................133Text increment................................................132

ASCII file formats.............................................269attributes

quick copy feature..........................................127auto backup

global changes.................................................224Auto-Junction

enabling / disabling..........................................60

B

Back annotationabout....................................................................57

backup library.......................................................82baud rate

plotter................................................................196Bill of Materials....................................................55

library text....................................................80, 90Bill of Materials report......................................199bold text, use of.....................................................24borders

sheet.....................................................................63Bring to front of command..............................129browsing.................................................................96buses

connectivity and................................................53

C

cache........................................................................81library..................................................................48

cache projectabout....................................................................82

capitalizationuse........................................................................24

capitalssmall ....................................................................24

child sheet.............................................................147circuit design

about....................................................................46Client / Server

architecture........................................................29Client Status Bar...................................................34clipboard

and selection....................................................118cutting a selection...........................................123Paste command and........................................125

Clipboard Reference option.............................124color

using..................................................................184Color Mode option.............................................189color printing

about..................................................................180command................................................See processcommunication

plotter................................................................195complex hierarchy..............................................148component

about....................................................................73accessing.............................................................74annotation of......................................................57cache....................................................................81copying...............................................................91

Page 334: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

334

creating...............................................................88footprint........................................................79, 89libraries...............................................................73multi-part...........................................................17part type field....................................................79text

about................................................................78component group..................................................90component parts....................................................90components

about....................................................................47on PCB..............................................................205

Components and Libraries..................................73Configuration........................................................60connection

selection............................................................122connections

intersheet..........................................................140wiring..................................................................50

connectivityabout....................................................................49logical..................................................................52methods...............................................................51netlists and........................................................164physical...............................................................52rules for...............................................................52

control pointadding................................................................117removing..........................................................117

copyclipboard reference, enabling........................60

cross probing................................................58, 204Cross Reference report...............................55, 201customizing...........See EDA Client, customizing

D

databaseexporting to,.....................................................231importing from,..............................................232interfacing to,..................................................227

decalcomponent....................................................79, 89

decompiledOrCAD libraries...............................................75

defaults, resetting..................................................42Delete command.................................................126Delete key

to remove vertex.............................................117descriptions

component..........................................................73De-select command............................................121

global changes.................................................224

deselecting objects..............................................118design

managing projects..........................................137design verification.......................................54, 155designator.........................................................79, 89

annotation of......................................................57designators

Paste command and........................................126devices

multiple component...................................47, 90directives (object type)........................................51directory

library files.........................................................75documentation.......................................................22DOS, version.........................................................23drag

object, how to..................................................129orthogonal, enabling........................................60

drawing, tools for...............................................107drivers

printer/plotter..................................................192

E

EDA Client.............................................................16customizing........................................................35environment.......................................................32getting started....................................................29installing a server..............................................39multiple servers.................................................18what is a Client server?....................................31what is EDA Client?.........................................30

EDA Editor Panel.................................................33EDA Editor Tabs...................................................33Edit menu.............................................................104Editor Tabs

customizing........................................................39electrical objects...................................................50

wiring..................................................................50Electrical Rule Check..........................................54

setting up..........................................................155Electrical Rules Check.........................................56extension

library files.........................................................75

F

fieldscomponent text..................................................78

fileabout sheet..........................................................62opening.........................................................40, 67saving..................................................................70

File menu..............................................................104

Page 335: USRGUIDE

User Guide

335

filesmultiple sheet..................................................137

filmplotting..............................................................194

find and replace, text..........................................129Fit On Page option.............................................190flat designs...........................................................144Focus.....................................................................114

compared to selection....................................118font

component text..................................................78Fonts......................................................................173

managing..........................................................173rotating..............................................................188system................................................................175using..................................................................173

footprintcomponent....................................................79, 89

footprintsmissing PCB....................................................205

forward annotation...............................................57

G

global editing.......................................................221attributes to match by....................................222change scope....................................................223copy attributes.................................................223selection and....................................................118using the {}......................................................224using wildcards...............................................223

global net identifiers............................................51global nets...................................................141, 167graphical editing.................................................116graphical objects.................................................107graphics

using..................................................................185grid

electrical.............................................................65snap......................................................................64visible..................................................................64

Grids........................................................................64group

component..........................................................90

H

handlesin focused objects...........................................115

hardcopyabout..................................................................187

heightsheet.....................................................................62

Help menu............................................................106

hidden pinsconnecting........................................................141

hierarchy...............................................................138five models of..................................................143project report.....................................................55simple................................................................147tools for creating.............................................152working with...................................................150

highlighting.........................................................119

I

iconproject sheet.......................................................69

IEEEtools for.............................................................108

ink jet plotters......................................................183Insert key

to add vertex....................................................117inside area

selection............................................................121Installing Advanced Schematic.........................26

entering access codes.......................................26intersheet connections.......................................140ISO

sheet border........................................................63italic text

use ........................................................................23

J

Jump To command...............................................97

K

keyboardshortcuts............................................................108

Keyboard Shortcut Keys.....................................36customizing........................................................36

L

labels, net................................................................51landscape mode...................................................190landscape orientation...........................................62Languages...............................................................41laser printers........................................................183layout directives....................................................58libraries...................................................................85

about....................................................................73cache....................................................................81Protel Schematic.............................................263

Libraries, loading..................................................75library

about components.............................................47

Page 336: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

336

component group..............................................90opening to edit...................................................86sheet archive......................................................83Sheet Path field...............................................150tools for.............................................................108

Library Editor..................................................73, 85Library Reference field.......................................78library text fields............................................80, 90library, project cache...........................................82links

project sheet.....................................................138Links With Advanced PCB..............................203local nets...............................................................167location

jumping to..........................................................97logical connectivity

about....................................................................52

M

main toolbars.......................................................107Make Project Library command.......................83manual conventions.............................................23marker

location...............................................................97mask

filelibraries...........................................................75

master sheet............................................................69about..................................................................139

menuEdit.....................................................................104File.....................................................................104Help...................................................................106Options..............................................................105Place..................................................................105Reports..............................................................105Tools..................................................................105View..................................................................105Window............................................................106

Menusabout..................................................................104customizing........................................................36

modular design....................................................148module ports (OrCAD).....................................141mouse

shortcuts............................................................108move

object, how to..................................................128Moving and Dragging.......................................128multi-sheet projects

managing..........................................................137

N

net identifierNet Labels and Ports Global................146, 167Only Ports Global...........................................167Ports Only Global...........................................145scope..................................................................142scope, setting....................................................167Sheet Symbol / Port Connections...............168Sheet Symbols / Port Connections.............147

net identifier scope.............................................167net identifiers

about....................................................................51net label

connectivity and................................................53net labels...............................................................141Net Labels and Ports Global.............................146netlist.....................................................................163

about...........................................................57, 165component text..................................................78connectivity and................................................49Electrical Rule Check....................................155format................................................................166generating.........................................................166options...............................................................168problems loading............................................205Protel 2 format................................................169Protel format...................................................168SPICE................................................................235

O

objectplacing...............................................................111reference point when moving........................61

Objects..................................................................111adding to selection..........................................119aligning.............................................................133editing...............................................................113OrCAD design.................................................257selecting...................................................118, 121

On-line Helpabout....................................................................24

Open Project command..............................69, 137options

printer................................................................190Options menu......................................................105Orcad

about compatibility........................................255compatibility.....................................................17hierarchy...........................................................140layout directive.................................................58libraries

Page 337: USRGUIDE

User Guide

337

loading............................................................75orthogonal wire placement...............................112outside area

selection............................................................122

P

packagecomponent..........................................................90

panel....................................See EDA Editor Panelpanel, editor...........................................................38panning...................................................................95paper

plot quality.......................................................194parent sheet..........................................................147part...........................................................................17

about....................................................................74attributes.............................................................78backup library...................................................82footprint........................................................79, 89placing.................................................................77re-annotation of................................................57sheet path............................................................80text

about................................................................78text fields............................................................80updating..............................................................83

part type..................................................................79parts

about component..............................................47cross reference...................................................55libraries...............................................................73multiple component.........................................90

pathlibrary files.........................................................75

patterncomponent....................................................79, 89

patternsPCB component..............................................205

PCBback annotation.................................................57cross probing.....................................................58forward annotation...........................................57layout directives................................................58

PCB designlinks to.................................................................57

pensassigning plotter..............................................193plotter................................................................194

physical connectivity...........................................52Pin

attributes.............................................................88hidden..................................................................81

moving the pin text..........................................60pins

connectivity and................................................53PCB component..............................................205

Place menu...........................................................105Placement variable

in arrays............................................................132plots

about..................................................................192drafting film....................................................194quality of..........................................................193scaling...............................................................190

plotterproblems with..................................................196

plotter communication......................................195plotter pens...........................................................194plotters

about pen..........................................................182port...........................................................................51portrait mode.......................................................190portrait orientation...............................................62ports.......................................................................141

connectivity and................................................53global vs local..................................................167

Ports Only Global...............................................145PostScript.............................................................187

about.........................................................183, 192power ports..........................................................141presentation quality............................................179previewing prints/plots.....................................190primitives

setting defaults..................................................61printer capabilities..............................................180printing...............................................See hardcopy

about..................................................................187sheet borders......................................................63

printsscaling...............................................................190

processabout..................................................................101

Processes...........................................................34, 35project

archiving library for........................................83Electrical Rule Check....................................155opening...............................................................69saving..................................................................70saving files.........................................................70

Project Hierarchy report............................55, 202project management

about..................................................................137Project Manager....................................................34

customizing........................................................38

Page 338: USRGUIDE

Advanced Schematic

338

projectsdesign verification............................................54printing.............................................................187

Protel DOS Schematiccompatibility...................................................263

Protel Schematiclibraries

loading............................................................75

R

Re-entrant Editing..............................................219reference

clipboard option..............................................124reference point....................................................133removing project sheets....................................153report

bill of material.................................................199component..........................................................92component rule check......................................92cross reference.................................................201library..................................................................92project hierarchy.............................................202

reports...................................................................199bill of materials.................................................55cross reference...................................................55Electrical Rule Check......................................56netlist compare..................................................57project hierarchy...............................................55

Reports menu.......................................................105Resources................................................................34

customizing........................................................35Routing Directives.............................................203RS-232C...............................................................195

S

Save All command...............................................70Save Project command........................................70scale

print/plot...........................................................190schematic

updating..............................................................91schematic capture

advantages of.....................................................47fundamentals.....................................................46

Schematic Editor Reference..........................15, 23Schematic Library Editor...................................17Schematic Sheet Editor.......................................16Select Connection command.............................54Select Net command...................................54, 120Select Printer option..........................................188selection................................................................114

about..................................................................114

all items on sheet.............................................122Cut command and...........................................123duplicate designators.....................................126inside area.........................................................121net.......................................................................122Paste command and........................................125Toggle command............................................123

Send to back of command................................129Server

installing and starting......................................39what is a server?................................................31

sheetabout....................................................................62back annotation.................................................57backup library...................................................82borders..........................................................63, 64complex............................................................151Electrical Rule Check....................................155library archive...................................................83managing project............................................137master.........................................................69, 151parts .....................................................................74sub-sheet...........................................................151title block............................................................64

sheet entry..............................................................51connectivity and................................................53

sheet icon................................................................69Sheet Path field...................................................150sheet symbol........................................................139sheet symbols.....................................141, 149, 168Sheet Symbols / Port Connections.................147sheet template

specifying...........................................................60sheet templates....................................................213

creating.............................................................214sheets

adding or removing........................................153connecting........................................................140design verification............................................54from OrCAD files..........................................255printing.............................................................187

shortcut keysfrequently used..................................................99

shortcutsmouse and keyboard......................................108

simple hierarchy.................................................147size

choosing sheet...................................................62small capitals

use ........................................................................24special strings

converting on screen........................................61

Page 339: USRGUIDE

User Guide

339

entering their contents.....................................65list of,.................................................................214using..................................................................213

Spice Interface....................................................235SRC file format.....................................................75subsheet

about..................................................................139Supress ERC command.....................................155symbol

ERC......................................................................56Syntax Highlighting............................................42System Font.........................................................175System Requirements..........................................25

T

tabs.........................................See EDA Editor Tabsterminology

about....................................................................23text

component sheet.........................................80, 90library fields................................................80, 90special strings....................................................20working with...................................................129

text editor...............................................................40document options.............................................42languages............................................................41syntax highlighting..........................................42

tiling prints/plots................................................190tool buttons..........................................................106Toolbars

about..................................................................106customizing........................................................35

Tools menu...........................................................105tree

project.................................................................69TrueType

component text..................................................78

U

undosetting stack size................................................61

units .........................................................................65update schematic...................................................91User Guide.............................................................22

V

verificationdesign..................................................................54

viewchanging.............................................................94

View menu...........................................................105

W

was-is list................................................................57width

sheet.....................................................................62window

project.................................................................69Window menu.....................................................106Windows.................................................................23

display options..................................................22wire

connectivty and.................................................52placement mode..............................................112

wiringabout....................................................................50tools for.............................................................107

workspacesize.......................................................................63

X

Xilinx Interface...................................................245